Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf ·...

50
Ephesians: An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching © 2020 by Benjamin I. Simpson Published by Kregel Academic, an imprint of Kregel Publications, 2450 Oak Industrial Dr. NE, Grand Rapids, MI 49505-6020. is book is a title in the Big Greek Idea Series, edited by Herbert W. Bateman IV. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or trans- mitted in any form or by any means—electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or other- wise—without written permission of the publisher, except for brief quotations in printed reviews. e Hebrew font, NewJerusalemU, and the Greek font, GraecaU, are available from www.linguist- soſtware.com/lgku.htm, +1-425-775-1130. Nestle-Aland, Novum Testamentum Graece, 28 th Revised Edition, edited by Barbara and Kurt Aland, Johannes Karavidopoulos, Carlo M. Martini, and Bruce M. Metzger in cooperation with the Institute for New Testament Textual Research, Münster/Westphalia, © 2012 Deutsche Bibelgesellschaſt, Stuttgart. Used by permission. e translation of the New Testament portions used throughout the commentary is the author’s own English rendering of the Greek. Scripture quotations marked net are from the NET Bible® copyright ©1996–2006 by Biblical Studies Press, LLC (www.bible.org). Scripture quoted by permission. All rights reserved. Scripture quotations marked nlt are from the Holy Bible, New Living Translation, copyright © 1996, 2004, 2007 by Tyndale House Foundation. Used by permission of Tyndale House Publishers, Inc., Carol Stream, Illinois 60188. All rights reserved. ISBN 978-0-8254-4543-9 Printed in the United States of America 20 21 22 23 24 / 5 4 3 2 1

Transcript of Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf ·...

Page 1: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teachingcopy 2020 by Benjamin I Simpson

Published by Kregel Academic an imprint of Kregel Publications 2450 Oak Industrial Dr NE Grand Rapids MI 49505-6020

is book is a title in the Big Greek Idea Series edited by Herbert W Bateman IV

All rights reserved No part of this book may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or trans-mitted in any form or by any meansmdashelectronic mechanical photocopy recording or other-wisemdashwithout written permission of the publisher except for brief quotations in printed reviews

e Hebrew font NewJerusalemU and the Greek font GraecaU are available from wwwlinguist-sowarecomlgkuhtm +1-425-775-1130

Nestle-Aland Novum Testamentum Graece 28th Revised Edition edited by Barbara and Kurt Aland Johannes Karavidopoulos Carlo M Martini and Bruce M Metzger in cooperation with the Institute for New Testament Textual Research MuumlnsterWestphalia copy 2012 Deutsche Bibelgesellscha Stuttgart Used by permission

e translation of the New Testament portions used throughout the commentary is the authorrsquos own English rendering of the Greek

Scripture quotations marked net are from the NET Biblereg copyright copy1996ndash2006 by Biblical Studies Press LLC (wwwbibleorg) Scripture quoted by permission All rights reserved

Scripture quotations marked nlt are from the Holy Bible New Living Translation copyright copy 1996 2004 2007 by Tyndale House Foundation Used by permission of Tyndale House Publishers Inc Carol Stream Illinois 60188 All rights reserved

ISBN 978-0-8254-4543-9

Printed in the United States of America

20 21 22 23 24 5 4 3 2 1

Contents

Preface to the Series 10

Authorrsquos Acknowledgments 14

Abbreviations 15

Introduction 20

The Clausal Outline 21

Pauline Independent Clauses 25

Pauline Dependent Clauses 31

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians 45

The Vocabulary of Ephesians 49

Ephesians 58

Ephesians 11ndash2 60

Paul identifies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Ephesians 13ndash14 66

God deserves praise because he blesses believers in Christ by choosing them for adoption by redeeming them through the death of Christ and by giving them the Holy Spirit who serves as a guarantee of Godrsquos salvation in the future

Ephesians 115ndash23 89

Paul prays that through spiritual insight God reveals the hope of the believersrsquo call the depth of his inheritance and his immeasur-able power available to them the same power through which God raised Christ from the dead and gives him dominion over all the authorities of the world

Ephesians 21ndash10 108

Despite once being dead in sins and under satanic control God demonstrates his mercy to the world by saving believers making them alive and giving them a seat in the heavenlies with Christmdashan act of gracemdashso that they might walk in the good works that he has prepared for them

Ephesians 211ndash22 131

Even though Gentiles were once without hope and alienated from the covenantal promises that God gave to Israel Christ destroyed the hostility between the two groups through his death by nullify-ing the law and granting peace and access to God for both groupsAs a result he created a new people group out of the two the church founded on Christ and in which the Spirit of God dwells

Ephesians 31ndash13 157

According to his plan God reveals the mystery of Christ to Paul along with the apostles and prophets in order to proclaim this mystery to the rulers and authorities of this world namely that Gentiles have become fellow heirs and fellow partakers of the promise of Christ with the Jews

Ephesians 314ndash21 180

God who is able to do more than anyone can imagine deserves all glory for strengthening the believers and for allowing them to grow in ways that are inconceivable since they have a firm foundation

Ephesians 41ndash16 195

Believers should walk in a manner worthy of their Christian faith by keeping the unity of the community which God made possible by appointing Christian leaders to train the body and which is essen-tial for the growth of the body to withstand attacks of the evil one

Ephesians 417ndash32 229

Believers should walk in holiness recalling the change in their lives in light of their new identity as Christians and as a result they should build up the community through their behavior and cease any conduct that breaks down the communitycease any conduct that breaks down the communitycease any conduct that breaks down the community

Ephesians 51ndash6 265

Believers should imitate God by loving one another like Christ who loved us by sacrificing himself for us They should abstain from any sign of sexual deviancy or harsh words since these types of people will not inherit the kingdom rather believers should be known for thanksgiving

Ephesians 57ndash14 280

Believers should walk as children of light characterized by good-ness justice and truth not associating with those who do shame-ful deeds of evil but rather exposing them

Ephesians 515ndash21 296

Believers should walk in wisdom to understand the will of God because the age is evil and submit to the Holy Spirit with the result that they speak to one another with psalms sing praise to God give thanks always and submit to one another

Ephesians 522ndash33 310

Wives should voluntarily submit to their husbands as they would to the Lord because he is the head husbands should love their wives self-sacrificially as they would care for their own bodies just as Christ loved the church

Ephesians 61ndash4 335

Children should obey and honor their parents fathers should raise their children without provoking them to anger disciplining them and teaching them with Christian instruction

Ephesians 65ndash9 343

Slaves should obey their masters wholeheartedly as if they are serving the Lord himself masters should treat their slaves with the same respect knowing that they also serve the Lord who judges without partialitywithout partialitywithout partiality

Ephesians 610ndash20 354

Believers must empower themselves through prayer by taking ad-vantage of the spiritual provision that God has provided in order to withstand the devil and his attacks on them

Ephesians 621ndash24 374

Paul closes the letter by commending Tychicus a trusted servant who ministers to the church to provide an update of his circum-stances and by praying that God gives them peace love faith and grace

Ephesians Interpretive Translation 381

Figures of Speech in Ephesians 388

Bibliography Bibliography 398

Nugget Index 404

20

Introduction

Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching guides pastors and Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teachingteachers in their understanding on Paulrsquos Greek structure his use of Greek claus-es his Greek syntax and his Greek writing style with this single intention to underscore Paulrsquos numerous big Greek ideas1 Tracing the various big Greek ideas in Ephesians is possible by recognizing Paulrsquos thought process evident in the co-ordination and subordination of the Greek clauses he employs within each of his letters We do not assume that pastors and teachers remember everything learned during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or seminary classes We strive to dene and explain Paulrsquos use of Greek in ways that help pas-tors and teachers recall what was once learned refresh and expand an apprecia-tion for Paulrsquos presentation in Koine Greek and underscore the value to engage the Greek text when preparing to preach and teach Ephesians

We construct the Greek words from Ephesians in 109 independent clauses and 255 dependent clauses and arrange them into clausal outlines Each clause is translated and then explained for interpretive recognition comprehension and communication e clausal outlines represent an early stage in preparing to preach and teach the text2 All the clauses appear in Greek from NA28 along with an interpretive translation for easy usage e clausal outlines make it possible for pastors to visualize the relationship clauses have to one another in order to trace Paulrsquos $ow of thought and ultimately his big idea

Number of Greek Words in Ephesians

Chapter NA28 SBL RP2005 MT THGNT

Ephesians 1 401 401 405 405 402

Ephesians 2 362 362 361 361 362

Ephesians 3 325 324 334 334 325

Ephesians 4 483 482 486 487 482

Ephesians 5 457 455 471 471 457

Ephesians 6 394 393 402 401 394

1 Portions of this work are excerpted from Simpson 2015 used by permission of the Cyber-Center for Biblical Studies

2 For nine steps of exegesis see Bateman 2013

e Clausal Outline 21

The Clausal Outline

e clausal outlines for Ephesians are based on a variety of Greek clauses em-ployed throughout the letter By nature a Greek clause has a subject and a predi-cate which may be a verb a participle or an innitive ey may be independent or dependent Greek clauses Whereas independent clauses can stand alone de-pendent clauses have a subordinate relationship to another clause

Other terminology exists for this same process Mounce (1996 xvindashxxiii) calls it ldquophrasingrdquo Guthrie (Guthrie and Duvall 1998 27ndash42) calls it ldquogrammatical diagramrdquo and MacDonald (1986 145ndash52) calls it ldquotextual transcriptionrdquo While these other works tend to break sentences into clauses and phrases Ephesians concentrates on the clause level As you work your way through the clauses in Paulrsquos letter to the Ephesians you can expect the following

1 Every clause reproduces the Greek text in the exact word order of NA28 even when syntax is less than clear Every attempt is made to make sense of Paulrsquos syntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of clarity

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important struc-tural markers A structural marker is always a verb which may be a verbal (participle or innitive) Other important structural markers are conjunc-tions relative and demonstrative pronouns and a select number of prepo-sitional phrases that introduce clauses Structural markers are always under-lined and oen in bold print For instance

528a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω528a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

e major structural marker is the imperative κλεπτέτω and therefore underlined and in bold type e substantival participle κλέπτων is an im-portant verbal but not the structural maker so the parentheses oampset it for visual purposes

3 Every Greek structural marker serves to distinguish diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses e chart below summarizes the types of in-dependent and dependent Greek clauses found in Ephesians and the means by which they are introduced

22 Introduction

Types (Classications) of Independent and Dependent Clauses3

ree Types of Independent Clauses Four Types of Dependent Clauses

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by simple connective (καί or δέ)

contrastive conjunction (ἀλλά δέ πλήν)

correlative conjunction (microὲν hellip δέ or

καὶ hellip καί)

explanatory conjunction (γάρ) inferential conjunction (ἄρα διό οὖν or

γάρ) or

transitional conjunction (καί δέ or οὖν)

Pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ)

a relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as)

a relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος)

Prepositional clauses are introduced by ldquofor this reasonrdquo (διὰ τοῦτο)

ldquofor this reasonrdquo (ἐπὶ τοῦτο) ldquoas a result of thisrdquo (ἐκ τούτου) ldquowhyrdquo (εἰς τί) or

ldquoin thisrdquo (ἐν τούτῳ)

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by

a subordinate conjunction that denotes seman-tical concepts such as time (ὅτε ὅτον)

reason and cause (διό ὅτι ἐπεί) purpose and result (ἵνα ὥστε) or

comparison (καθώς ὡς ὡσεί ὥσπερ) etc

Participial clauses are introduced by participles

eir objects may be a noun pronoun preposi-tional phrases etc

Asyndeton clauses are not introduced by a conjunctive word or phrase

Innitival clauses are introduced by innitives

4 Every independent Greek clause (the main thought) is placed farthest to the le of the page Dependent Greek clauses that directly modify a Greek word in another clause are either placed in parentheses or positioned under (or above if necessary) the word it modies for easy identication is positioning of a clause visualizes the subordination and coordination of Ephesiansrsquo basic gram-matical and syntactical relationships parallelisms and emphases

5 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has an interpretive English translation provided under the Greek text Every translated structural mark-er is also underlined and oen in bold print for easy recognition use and print for easy recognition use and evaluation

3 W 656ndash65 ere is a diamperence between the chart above and Wallace Whereas the pronominal clause represents both the relative and demonstrative pronoun in the chart on this page Wallace limits the category to a relative pronoun

e Clausal Outline 23

One to Five Exemplied

An example of what to expect is nicely illustrated with a verse from Ephesians 115ndash16

15 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο κἀγὼ ἀκούσαςἀκούσας τὴν καθrsquo ὑmicroᾶς πίστιν ἐν τῷ κυρίῳἸησοῦ καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην τὴν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους

15 For this reason aer hearingaer hearing about your faith in the Lord Jesus aer hearingand your love for all of the saints

16a οὐ παύοmicroαιπαύοmicroαι16a I do not cease

16b εὐχαριστῶνεὐχαριστῶν ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν16b giving thanksgiving thanks on your behalf on your behalf

16c microνείαν ποιούmicroενοςποιούmicroενος ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν microου16c while rememberingremembering you in my prayersremembering

1 e order of the Greek sentence is followed

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important structural markers

3 Every Greek structural marker distinguishes the diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses Ephesians 115ndash16 has three dependent participle Greek clauses verse 16a is an independent conjunctive clause introduced by ∆ιὰ τοῦτοintroduced by

4 e independent clause (ve independent clause (ve independent clause (v 16a) is placed to the extreme le e three de-pendent participle clauses function adverbially modifying the main verbe participles are indented to show their relationship to the main verbSince the adverbial participles are the major structural markers they are clearly identied

5 Every Greek clause has a corresponding English translation and all the translated structural markers are identied for easy recognition

6 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has a corresponding explanato-ry discussion that underscores the grammatical syntactical and semantic func-tions of their respective Greek structural markers that are underlined and oen underlined

24 Introduction

in bold print printbold us not every word within a clause is discussed explanatory discussions major on the structural makers in order to underscore Paulrsquos pointYet if a structural marker is not in bold it is oen for easier visual distinctions

Grammatical Function Grammatical function identies the Greek structural marker as to whether it is pronominal conjunctive a verb or verbal (participle or innitive) If the marker is a verb or verbal it is parsed with an appropriate lexical meaning provided from BDAG If it is pronominal or conjunctive a lexical denition is also provided based upon BDAG

Syntactical Function Syntactical function rst draws attention to the independent or dependent clausersquos type If it is a dependent clause its syn-tactical function within a sentence is underscored All clauses are identi-ed as either substantival adjectival or adverbial as well as the word or words the clause modies

Semantic Function Semantic functions are by nature interpretive sug-gestions whereby a Greek structural marker is explained based upon its literary context Semantic interpretations employ the categories listed and dened in Wallacersquos Greek Grammar beyond the Basics (1996) many of which are discussed in critical commentaries and re$ected in English Bible translations

7 Explanatory discussions about Greek structural markers are interspersed with commentary-like remarks identied as nuggets Numerous text-critical grammatical syntactical structural theological and lexical nuggets appear between clausal presentations that delve deeper into and expand on issues in order to advance your appreciation for Ephesians its readers and its message

8 All independent and dependent Greek clauses are grouped into units of thought Ephesians is broken into seventeen units of thought

9 Every unit opens with a structural overview that provides a synopsis for the unitrsquos structure and each summary is followed with a ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo statement

10 An interpretive English translation of Ephesians concludes Ephesians An Ex-egetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching

All ten expectations are intended to help pastors and teachers recall and refresh their previous training in Greek to expand a personrsquos understanding of Koine Greek and to encourage personal engagement with the Greek text Hopefully the

e Clausal Outline 25

process in this book will increase condence in understanding and appreciating Ephesians for preaching and teaching it

Yet Ephesians is not a guide for translation ere are works designed for that task (Larkin Simpson 2015 Merkle) is book is a grammatical-like commentary with interlinear-like English translations of the Greek text that provides exposi-tional commentary-like comments to guide a pastor and teacher in their sermon and teaching preparations

But before delving into examining the ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo in Ephesians it may be helpful to pause dene and illustrate the diamperent types of Greek clauses typical-ly found in the letter

Pauline Independent Clauses

Independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought in a given sentence ere are three types of independent Greek clauses found in the Greek New Testament conjunctive prepositional and asyndetic All three types of independent clauses appear in Ephesians

e rst and most common type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek conjunctive clause is clause is introduced by a Greek conjunction (καί δέ γάρ ἀλλά ἄρα διό οὖν πλήν) Sometimes the Greek conjunction starts the independent clause Other times it appears in a postposi-tive position e independent conjunctive clause dominates Ephesians In fact independent conjunctive clauses appear in Ephesians at least sixty-eight timese following are a few representative samples worthy of mention

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are saved by grace through faith

214a Αὐτὸς γάργάρ ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡmicroῶν214a For he is our peace

219a ἄρα οὖνἄρα οὖν οὐκέτι ἐστὲ ξένοι καὶ πάροικοι219a So then you are no longer strangers and aliens

313a διὸ αἰτοῦmicroαι microὴ ἐγκακεῖν ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσίν microου ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν313a 9erefore I ask that you not be discouraged because of my suampering on your

behalf

41a Παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑmicroᾶς ἐγὼ ὁ δέσmicroιος ἐν κυρίῳ41a 9erefore I a prisoner in the Lord urge you

26 Introduction

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

430a καὶ microὴ λυπεῖτε τὸ πνεῦmicroα τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ430a And do not grieve the Holy Spirit of God

51 γίνεσθε οὖν microιmicroηταὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά51 9erefore be imitators of God as beloved children

533a πλὴνπλὴν καὶ ὑmicroεῖς οἱ καθrsquo ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω533a Nevertheless each of you love your own wife each of you love your own wife

64a Καὶ οἱ πατέρες microὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑmicroῶν64a And fathers do not anger your children

Naturally these Greek conjunctive clauses are independent because they con-tain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneWhile it is not evident above in the pages to follow all independent clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they are independent Each of the independent clauses above begins with a Greek conjunction that makes some sort of connection with a previous clause or transitions to a new thoughtAlso as you can see from the samples above conjunctions sometimes appear in the postpositive position (Eph 28a 14a 41a 20 51) but not always (Eph219a 313a 430a 533a 64a)

e most frequent independent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are those introduced with καί Of the sixty-seven conjunctive independent clauses in Ephesians 35 percent begin with ldquoandrdquo (καί) Even though Paulrsquos favored conjunction is καί ve other Greek conjunctions appear in Ephesians ἀλλά ἄρα οὖν γάρ δέ διό and οὖν e following chart not only lists the Greek conjunction and where they appear in Ephesians it identies how the conjunc-tion has been interpreted semantically in our interpretive English translation for Ephesians

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Ascensive

e conjunction pro-vides a point of focus

ldquoevenrdquo

531c

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 2: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Contents

Preface to the Series 10

Authorrsquos Acknowledgments 14

Abbreviations 15

Introduction 20

The Clausal Outline 21

Pauline Independent Clauses 25

Pauline Dependent Clauses 31

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians 45

The Vocabulary of Ephesians 49

Ephesians 58

Ephesians 11ndash2 60

Paul identifies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Ephesians 13ndash14 66

God deserves praise because he blesses believers in Christ by choosing them for adoption by redeeming them through the death of Christ and by giving them the Holy Spirit who serves as a guarantee of Godrsquos salvation in the future

Ephesians 115ndash23 89

Paul prays that through spiritual insight God reveals the hope of the believersrsquo call the depth of his inheritance and his immeasur-able power available to them the same power through which God raised Christ from the dead and gives him dominion over all the authorities of the world

Ephesians 21ndash10 108

Despite once being dead in sins and under satanic control God demonstrates his mercy to the world by saving believers making them alive and giving them a seat in the heavenlies with Christmdashan act of gracemdashso that they might walk in the good works that he has prepared for them

Ephesians 211ndash22 131

Even though Gentiles were once without hope and alienated from the covenantal promises that God gave to Israel Christ destroyed the hostility between the two groups through his death by nullify-ing the law and granting peace and access to God for both groupsAs a result he created a new people group out of the two the church founded on Christ and in which the Spirit of God dwells

Ephesians 31ndash13 157

According to his plan God reveals the mystery of Christ to Paul along with the apostles and prophets in order to proclaim this mystery to the rulers and authorities of this world namely that Gentiles have become fellow heirs and fellow partakers of the promise of Christ with the Jews

Ephesians 314ndash21 180

God who is able to do more than anyone can imagine deserves all glory for strengthening the believers and for allowing them to grow in ways that are inconceivable since they have a firm foundation

Ephesians 41ndash16 195

Believers should walk in a manner worthy of their Christian faith by keeping the unity of the community which God made possible by appointing Christian leaders to train the body and which is essen-tial for the growth of the body to withstand attacks of the evil one

Ephesians 417ndash32 229

Believers should walk in holiness recalling the change in their lives in light of their new identity as Christians and as a result they should build up the community through their behavior and cease any conduct that breaks down the communitycease any conduct that breaks down the communitycease any conduct that breaks down the community

Ephesians 51ndash6 265

Believers should imitate God by loving one another like Christ who loved us by sacrificing himself for us They should abstain from any sign of sexual deviancy or harsh words since these types of people will not inherit the kingdom rather believers should be known for thanksgiving

Ephesians 57ndash14 280

Believers should walk as children of light characterized by good-ness justice and truth not associating with those who do shame-ful deeds of evil but rather exposing them

Ephesians 515ndash21 296

Believers should walk in wisdom to understand the will of God because the age is evil and submit to the Holy Spirit with the result that they speak to one another with psalms sing praise to God give thanks always and submit to one another

Ephesians 522ndash33 310

Wives should voluntarily submit to their husbands as they would to the Lord because he is the head husbands should love their wives self-sacrificially as they would care for their own bodies just as Christ loved the church

Ephesians 61ndash4 335

Children should obey and honor their parents fathers should raise their children without provoking them to anger disciplining them and teaching them with Christian instruction

Ephesians 65ndash9 343

Slaves should obey their masters wholeheartedly as if they are serving the Lord himself masters should treat their slaves with the same respect knowing that they also serve the Lord who judges without partialitywithout partialitywithout partiality

Ephesians 610ndash20 354

Believers must empower themselves through prayer by taking ad-vantage of the spiritual provision that God has provided in order to withstand the devil and his attacks on them

Ephesians 621ndash24 374

Paul closes the letter by commending Tychicus a trusted servant who ministers to the church to provide an update of his circum-stances and by praying that God gives them peace love faith and grace

Ephesians Interpretive Translation 381

Figures of Speech in Ephesians 388

Bibliography Bibliography 398

Nugget Index 404

20

Introduction

Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching guides pastors and Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teachingteachers in their understanding on Paulrsquos Greek structure his use of Greek claus-es his Greek syntax and his Greek writing style with this single intention to underscore Paulrsquos numerous big Greek ideas1 Tracing the various big Greek ideas in Ephesians is possible by recognizing Paulrsquos thought process evident in the co-ordination and subordination of the Greek clauses he employs within each of his letters We do not assume that pastors and teachers remember everything learned during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or seminary classes We strive to dene and explain Paulrsquos use of Greek in ways that help pas-tors and teachers recall what was once learned refresh and expand an apprecia-tion for Paulrsquos presentation in Koine Greek and underscore the value to engage the Greek text when preparing to preach and teach Ephesians

We construct the Greek words from Ephesians in 109 independent clauses and 255 dependent clauses and arrange them into clausal outlines Each clause is translated and then explained for interpretive recognition comprehension and communication e clausal outlines represent an early stage in preparing to preach and teach the text2 All the clauses appear in Greek from NA28 along with an interpretive translation for easy usage e clausal outlines make it possible for pastors to visualize the relationship clauses have to one another in order to trace Paulrsquos $ow of thought and ultimately his big idea

Number of Greek Words in Ephesians

Chapter NA28 SBL RP2005 MT THGNT

Ephesians 1 401 401 405 405 402

Ephesians 2 362 362 361 361 362

Ephesians 3 325 324 334 334 325

Ephesians 4 483 482 486 487 482

Ephesians 5 457 455 471 471 457

Ephesians 6 394 393 402 401 394

1 Portions of this work are excerpted from Simpson 2015 used by permission of the Cyber-Center for Biblical Studies

2 For nine steps of exegesis see Bateman 2013

e Clausal Outline 21

The Clausal Outline

e clausal outlines for Ephesians are based on a variety of Greek clauses em-ployed throughout the letter By nature a Greek clause has a subject and a predi-cate which may be a verb a participle or an innitive ey may be independent or dependent Greek clauses Whereas independent clauses can stand alone de-pendent clauses have a subordinate relationship to another clause

Other terminology exists for this same process Mounce (1996 xvindashxxiii) calls it ldquophrasingrdquo Guthrie (Guthrie and Duvall 1998 27ndash42) calls it ldquogrammatical diagramrdquo and MacDonald (1986 145ndash52) calls it ldquotextual transcriptionrdquo While these other works tend to break sentences into clauses and phrases Ephesians concentrates on the clause level As you work your way through the clauses in Paulrsquos letter to the Ephesians you can expect the following

1 Every clause reproduces the Greek text in the exact word order of NA28 even when syntax is less than clear Every attempt is made to make sense of Paulrsquos syntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of clarity

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important struc-tural markers A structural marker is always a verb which may be a verbal (participle or innitive) Other important structural markers are conjunc-tions relative and demonstrative pronouns and a select number of prepo-sitional phrases that introduce clauses Structural markers are always under-lined and oen in bold print For instance

528a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω528a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

e major structural marker is the imperative κλεπτέτω and therefore underlined and in bold type e substantival participle κλέπτων is an im-portant verbal but not the structural maker so the parentheses oampset it for visual purposes

3 Every Greek structural marker serves to distinguish diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses e chart below summarizes the types of in-dependent and dependent Greek clauses found in Ephesians and the means by which they are introduced

22 Introduction

Types (Classications) of Independent and Dependent Clauses3

ree Types of Independent Clauses Four Types of Dependent Clauses

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by simple connective (καί or δέ)

contrastive conjunction (ἀλλά δέ πλήν)

correlative conjunction (microὲν hellip δέ or

καὶ hellip καί)

explanatory conjunction (γάρ) inferential conjunction (ἄρα διό οὖν or

γάρ) or

transitional conjunction (καί δέ or οὖν)

Pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ)

a relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as)

a relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος)

Prepositional clauses are introduced by ldquofor this reasonrdquo (διὰ τοῦτο)

ldquofor this reasonrdquo (ἐπὶ τοῦτο) ldquoas a result of thisrdquo (ἐκ τούτου) ldquowhyrdquo (εἰς τί) or

ldquoin thisrdquo (ἐν τούτῳ)

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by

a subordinate conjunction that denotes seman-tical concepts such as time (ὅτε ὅτον)

reason and cause (διό ὅτι ἐπεί) purpose and result (ἵνα ὥστε) or

comparison (καθώς ὡς ὡσεί ὥσπερ) etc

Participial clauses are introduced by participles

eir objects may be a noun pronoun preposi-tional phrases etc

Asyndeton clauses are not introduced by a conjunctive word or phrase

Innitival clauses are introduced by innitives

4 Every independent Greek clause (the main thought) is placed farthest to the le of the page Dependent Greek clauses that directly modify a Greek word in another clause are either placed in parentheses or positioned under (or above if necessary) the word it modies for easy identication is positioning of a clause visualizes the subordination and coordination of Ephesiansrsquo basic gram-matical and syntactical relationships parallelisms and emphases

5 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has an interpretive English translation provided under the Greek text Every translated structural mark-er is also underlined and oen in bold print for easy recognition use and print for easy recognition use and evaluation

3 W 656ndash65 ere is a diamperence between the chart above and Wallace Whereas the pronominal clause represents both the relative and demonstrative pronoun in the chart on this page Wallace limits the category to a relative pronoun

e Clausal Outline 23

One to Five Exemplied

An example of what to expect is nicely illustrated with a verse from Ephesians 115ndash16

15 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο κἀγὼ ἀκούσαςἀκούσας τὴν καθrsquo ὑmicroᾶς πίστιν ἐν τῷ κυρίῳἸησοῦ καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην τὴν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους

15 For this reason aer hearingaer hearing about your faith in the Lord Jesus aer hearingand your love for all of the saints

16a οὐ παύοmicroαιπαύοmicroαι16a I do not cease

16b εὐχαριστῶνεὐχαριστῶν ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν16b giving thanksgiving thanks on your behalf on your behalf

16c microνείαν ποιούmicroενοςποιούmicroενος ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν microου16c while rememberingremembering you in my prayersremembering

1 e order of the Greek sentence is followed

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important structural markers

3 Every Greek structural marker distinguishes the diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses Ephesians 115ndash16 has three dependent participle Greek clauses verse 16a is an independent conjunctive clause introduced by ∆ιὰ τοῦτοintroduced by

4 e independent clause (ve independent clause (ve independent clause (v 16a) is placed to the extreme le e three de-pendent participle clauses function adverbially modifying the main verbe participles are indented to show their relationship to the main verbSince the adverbial participles are the major structural markers they are clearly identied

5 Every Greek clause has a corresponding English translation and all the translated structural markers are identied for easy recognition

6 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has a corresponding explanato-ry discussion that underscores the grammatical syntactical and semantic func-tions of their respective Greek structural markers that are underlined and oen underlined

24 Introduction

in bold print printbold us not every word within a clause is discussed explanatory discussions major on the structural makers in order to underscore Paulrsquos pointYet if a structural marker is not in bold it is oen for easier visual distinctions

Grammatical Function Grammatical function identies the Greek structural marker as to whether it is pronominal conjunctive a verb or verbal (participle or innitive) If the marker is a verb or verbal it is parsed with an appropriate lexical meaning provided from BDAG If it is pronominal or conjunctive a lexical denition is also provided based upon BDAG

Syntactical Function Syntactical function rst draws attention to the independent or dependent clausersquos type If it is a dependent clause its syn-tactical function within a sentence is underscored All clauses are identi-ed as either substantival adjectival or adverbial as well as the word or words the clause modies

Semantic Function Semantic functions are by nature interpretive sug-gestions whereby a Greek structural marker is explained based upon its literary context Semantic interpretations employ the categories listed and dened in Wallacersquos Greek Grammar beyond the Basics (1996) many of which are discussed in critical commentaries and re$ected in English Bible translations

7 Explanatory discussions about Greek structural markers are interspersed with commentary-like remarks identied as nuggets Numerous text-critical grammatical syntactical structural theological and lexical nuggets appear between clausal presentations that delve deeper into and expand on issues in order to advance your appreciation for Ephesians its readers and its message

8 All independent and dependent Greek clauses are grouped into units of thought Ephesians is broken into seventeen units of thought

9 Every unit opens with a structural overview that provides a synopsis for the unitrsquos structure and each summary is followed with a ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo statement

10 An interpretive English translation of Ephesians concludes Ephesians An Ex-egetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching

All ten expectations are intended to help pastors and teachers recall and refresh their previous training in Greek to expand a personrsquos understanding of Koine Greek and to encourage personal engagement with the Greek text Hopefully the

e Clausal Outline 25

process in this book will increase condence in understanding and appreciating Ephesians for preaching and teaching it

Yet Ephesians is not a guide for translation ere are works designed for that task (Larkin Simpson 2015 Merkle) is book is a grammatical-like commentary with interlinear-like English translations of the Greek text that provides exposi-tional commentary-like comments to guide a pastor and teacher in their sermon and teaching preparations

But before delving into examining the ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo in Ephesians it may be helpful to pause dene and illustrate the diamperent types of Greek clauses typical-ly found in the letter

Pauline Independent Clauses

Independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought in a given sentence ere are three types of independent Greek clauses found in the Greek New Testament conjunctive prepositional and asyndetic All three types of independent clauses appear in Ephesians

e rst and most common type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek conjunctive clause is clause is introduced by a Greek conjunction (καί δέ γάρ ἀλλά ἄρα διό οὖν πλήν) Sometimes the Greek conjunction starts the independent clause Other times it appears in a postposi-tive position e independent conjunctive clause dominates Ephesians In fact independent conjunctive clauses appear in Ephesians at least sixty-eight timese following are a few representative samples worthy of mention

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are saved by grace through faith

214a Αὐτὸς γάργάρ ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡmicroῶν214a For he is our peace

219a ἄρα οὖνἄρα οὖν οὐκέτι ἐστὲ ξένοι καὶ πάροικοι219a So then you are no longer strangers and aliens

313a διὸ αἰτοῦmicroαι microὴ ἐγκακεῖν ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσίν microου ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν313a 9erefore I ask that you not be discouraged because of my suampering on your

behalf

41a Παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑmicroᾶς ἐγὼ ὁ δέσmicroιος ἐν κυρίῳ41a 9erefore I a prisoner in the Lord urge you

26 Introduction

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

430a καὶ microὴ λυπεῖτε τὸ πνεῦmicroα τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ430a And do not grieve the Holy Spirit of God

51 γίνεσθε οὖν microιmicroηταὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά51 9erefore be imitators of God as beloved children

533a πλὴνπλὴν καὶ ὑmicroεῖς οἱ καθrsquo ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω533a Nevertheless each of you love your own wife each of you love your own wife

64a Καὶ οἱ πατέρες microὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑmicroῶν64a And fathers do not anger your children

Naturally these Greek conjunctive clauses are independent because they con-tain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneWhile it is not evident above in the pages to follow all independent clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they are independent Each of the independent clauses above begins with a Greek conjunction that makes some sort of connection with a previous clause or transitions to a new thoughtAlso as you can see from the samples above conjunctions sometimes appear in the postpositive position (Eph 28a 14a 41a 20 51) but not always (Eph219a 313a 430a 533a 64a)

e most frequent independent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are those introduced with καί Of the sixty-seven conjunctive independent clauses in Ephesians 35 percent begin with ldquoandrdquo (καί) Even though Paulrsquos favored conjunction is καί ve other Greek conjunctions appear in Ephesians ἀλλά ἄρα οὖν γάρ δέ διό and οὖν e following chart not only lists the Greek conjunction and where they appear in Ephesians it identies how the conjunc-tion has been interpreted semantically in our interpretive English translation for Ephesians

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Ascensive

e conjunction pro-vides a point of focus

ldquoevenrdquo

531c

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 3: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Ephesians 211ndash22 131

Even though Gentiles were once without hope and alienated from the covenantal promises that God gave to Israel Christ destroyed the hostility between the two groups through his death by nullify-ing the law and granting peace and access to God for both groupsAs a result he created a new people group out of the two the church founded on Christ and in which the Spirit of God dwells

Ephesians 31ndash13 157

According to his plan God reveals the mystery of Christ to Paul along with the apostles and prophets in order to proclaim this mystery to the rulers and authorities of this world namely that Gentiles have become fellow heirs and fellow partakers of the promise of Christ with the Jews

Ephesians 314ndash21 180

God who is able to do more than anyone can imagine deserves all glory for strengthening the believers and for allowing them to grow in ways that are inconceivable since they have a firm foundation

Ephesians 41ndash16 195

Believers should walk in a manner worthy of their Christian faith by keeping the unity of the community which God made possible by appointing Christian leaders to train the body and which is essen-tial for the growth of the body to withstand attacks of the evil one

Ephesians 417ndash32 229

Believers should walk in holiness recalling the change in their lives in light of their new identity as Christians and as a result they should build up the community through their behavior and cease any conduct that breaks down the communitycease any conduct that breaks down the communitycease any conduct that breaks down the community

Ephesians 51ndash6 265

Believers should imitate God by loving one another like Christ who loved us by sacrificing himself for us They should abstain from any sign of sexual deviancy or harsh words since these types of people will not inherit the kingdom rather believers should be known for thanksgiving

Ephesians 57ndash14 280

Believers should walk as children of light characterized by good-ness justice and truth not associating with those who do shame-ful deeds of evil but rather exposing them

Ephesians 515ndash21 296

Believers should walk in wisdom to understand the will of God because the age is evil and submit to the Holy Spirit with the result that they speak to one another with psalms sing praise to God give thanks always and submit to one another

Ephesians 522ndash33 310

Wives should voluntarily submit to their husbands as they would to the Lord because he is the head husbands should love their wives self-sacrificially as they would care for their own bodies just as Christ loved the church

Ephesians 61ndash4 335

Children should obey and honor their parents fathers should raise their children without provoking them to anger disciplining them and teaching them with Christian instruction

Ephesians 65ndash9 343

Slaves should obey their masters wholeheartedly as if they are serving the Lord himself masters should treat their slaves with the same respect knowing that they also serve the Lord who judges without partialitywithout partialitywithout partiality

Ephesians 610ndash20 354

Believers must empower themselves through prayer by taking ad-vantage of the spiritual provision that God has provided in order to withstand the devil and his attacks on them

Ephesians 621ndash24 374

Paul closes the letter by commending Tychicus a trusted servant who ministers to the church to provide an update of his circum-stances and by praying that God gives them peace love faith and grace

Ephesians Interpretive Translation 381

Figures of Speech in Ephesians 388

Bibliography Bibliography 398

Nugget Index 404

20

Introduction

Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching guides pastors and Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teachingteachers in their understanding on Paulrsquos Greek structure his use of Greek claus-es his Greek syntax and his Greek writing style with this single intention to underscore Paulrsquos numerous big Greek ideas1 Tracing the various big Greek ideas in Ephesians is possible by recognizing Paulrsquos thought process evident in the co-ordination and subordination of the Greek clauses he employs within each of his letters We do not assume that pastors and teachers remember everything learned during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or seminary classes We strive to dene and explain Paulrsquos use of Greek in ways that help pas-tors and teachers recall what was once learned refresh and expand an apprecia-tion for Paulrsquos presentation in Koine Greek and underscore the value to engage the Greek text when preparing to preach and teach Ephesians

We construct the Greek words from Ephesians in 109 independent clauses and 255 dependent clauses and arrange them into clausal outlines Each clause is translated and then explained for interpretive recognition comprehension and communication e clausal outlines represent an early stage in preparing to preach and teach the text2 All the clauses appear in Greek from NA28 along with an interpretive translation for easy usage e clausal outlines make it possible for pastors to visualize the relationship clauses have to one another in order to trace Paulrsquos $ow of thought and ultimately his big idea

Number of Greek Words in Ephesians

Chapter NA28 SBL RP2005 MT THGNT

Ephesians 1 401 401 405 405 402

Ephesians 2 362 362 361 361 362

Ephesians 3 325 324 334 334 325

Ephesians 4 483 482 486 487 482

Ephesians 5 457 455 471 471 457

Ephesians 6 394 393 402 401 394

1 Portions of this work are excerpted from Simpson 2015 used by permission of the Cyber-Center for Biblical Studies

2 For nine steps of exegesis see Bateman 2013

e Clausal Outline 21

The Clausal Outline

e clausal outlines for Ephesians are based on a variety of Greek clauses em-ployed throughout the letter By nature a Greek clause has a subject and a predi-cate which may be a verb a participle or an innitive ey may be independent or dependent Greek clauses Whereas independent clauses can stand alone de-pendent clauses have a subordinate relationship to another clause

Other terminology exists for this same process Mounce (1996 xvindashxxiii) calls it ldquophrasingrdquo Guthrie (Guthrie and Duvall 1998 27ndash42) calls it ldquogrammatical diagramrdquo and MacDonald (1986 145ndash52) calls it ldquotextual transcriptionrdquo While these other works tend to break sentences into clauses and phrases Ephesians concentrates on the clause level As you work your way through the clauses in Paulrsquos letter to the Ephesians you can expect the following

1 Every clause reproduces the Greek text in the exact word order of NA28 even when syntax is less than clear Every attempt is made to make sense of Paulrsquos syntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of clarity

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important struc-tural markers A structural marker is always a verb which may be a verbal (participle or innitive) Other important structural markers are conjunc-tions relative and demonstrative pronouns and a select number of prepo-sitional phrases that introduce clauses Structural markers are always under-lined and oen in bold print For instance

528a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω528a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

e major structural marker is the imperative κλεπτέτω and therefore underlined and in bold type e substantival participle κλέπτων is an im-portant verbal but not the structural maker so the parentheses oampset it for visual purposes

3 Every Greek structural marker serves to distinguish diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses e chart below summarizes the types of in-dependent and dependent Greek clauses found in Ephesians and the means by which they are introduced

22 Introduction

Types (Classications) of Independent and Dependent Clauses3

ree Types of Independent Clauses Four Types of Dependent Clauses

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by simple connective (καί or δέ)

contrastive conjunction (ἀλλά δέ πλήν)

correlative conjunction (microὲν hellip δέ or

καὶ hellip καί)

explanatory conjunction (γάρ) inferential conjunction (ἄρα διό οὖν or

γάρ) or

transitional conjunction (καί δέ or οὖν)

Pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ)

a relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as)

a relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος)

Prepositional clauses are introduced by ldquofor this reasonrdquo (διὰ τοῦτο)

ldquofor this reasonrdquo (ἐπὶ τοῦτο) ldquoas a result of thisrdquo (ἐκ τούτου) ldquowhyrdquo (εἰς τί) or

ldquoin thisrdquo (ἐν τούτῳ)

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by

a subordinate conjunction that denotes seman-tical concepts such as time (ὅτε ὅτον)

reason and cause (διό ὅτι ἐπεί) purpose and result (ἵνα ὥστε) or

comparison (καθώς ὡς ὡσεί ὥσπερ) etc

Participial clauses are introduced by participles

eir objects may be a noun pronoun preposi-tional phrases etc

Asyndeton clauses are not introduced by a conjunctive word or phrase

Innitival clauses are introduced by innitives

4 Every independent Greek clause (the main thought) is placed farthest to the le of the page Dependent Greek clauses that directly modify a Greek word in another clause are either placed in parentheses or positioned under (or above if necessary) the word it modies for easy identication is positioning of a clause visualizes the subordination and coordination of Ephesiansrsquo basic gram-matical and syntactical relationships parallelisms and emphases

5 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has an interpretive English translation provided under the Greek text Every translated structural mark-er is also underlined and oen in bold print for easy recognition use and print for easy recognition use and evaluation

3 W 656ndash65 ere is a diamperence between the chart above and Wallace Whereas the pronominal clause represents both the relative and demonstrative pronoun in the chart on this page Wallace limits the category to a relative pronoun

e Clausal Outline 23

One to Five Exemplied

An example of what to expect is nicely illustrated with a verse from Ephesians 115ndash16

15 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο κἀγὼ ἀκούσαςἀκούσας τὴν καθrsquo ὑmicroᾶς πίστιν ἐν τῷ κυρίῳἸησοῦ καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην τὴν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους

15 For this reason aer hearingaer hearing about your faith in the Lord Jesus aer hearingand your love for all of the saints

16a οὐ παύοmicroαιπαύοmicroαι16a I do not cease

16b εὐχαριστῶνεὐχαριστῶν ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν16b giving thanksgiving thanks on your behalf on your behalf

16c microνείαν ποιούmicroενοςποιούmicroενος ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν microου16c while rememberingremembering you in my prayersremembering

1 e order of the Greek sentence is followed

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important structural markers

3 Every Greek structural marker distinguishes the diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses Ephesians 115ndash16 has three dependent participle Greek clauses verse 16a is an independent conjunctive clause introduced by ∆ιὰ τοῦτοintroduced by

4 e independent clause (ve independent clause (ve independent clause (v 16a) is placed to the extreme le e three de-pendent participle clauses function adverbially modifying the main verbe participles are indented to show their relationship to the main verbSince the adverbial participles are the major structural markers they are clearly identied

5 Every Greek clause has a corresponding English translation and all the translated structural markers are identied for easy recognition

6 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has a corresponding explanato-ry discussion that underscores the grammatical syntactical and semantic func-tions of their respective Greek structural markers that are underlined and oen underlined

24 Introduction

in bold print printbold us not every word within a clause is discussed explanatory discussions major on the structural makers in order to underscore Paulrsquos pointYet if a structural marker is not in bold it is oen for easier visual distinctions

Grammatical Function Grammatical function identies the Greek structural marker as to whether it is pronominal conjunctive a verb or verbal (participle or innitive) If the marker is a verb or verbal it is parsed with an appropriate lexical meaning provided from BDAG If it is pronominal or conjunctive a lexical denition is also provided based upon BDAG

Syntactical Function Syntactical function rst draws attention to the independent or dependent clausersquos type If it is a dependent clause its syn-tactical function within a sentence is underscored All clauses are identi-ed as either substantival adjectival or adverbial as well as the word or words the clause modies

Semantic Function Semantic functions are by nature interpretive sug-gestions whereby a Greek structural marker is explained based upon its literary context Semantic interpretations employ the categories listed and dened in Wallacersquos Greek Grammar beyond the Basics (1996) many of which are discussed in critical commentaries and re$ected in English Bible translations

7 Explanatory discussions about Greek structural markers are interspersed with commentary-like remarks identied as nuggets Numerous text-critical grammatical syntactical structural theological and lexical nuggets appear between clausal presentations that delve deeper into and expand on issues in order to advance your appreciation for Ephesians its readers and its message

8 All independent and dependent Greek clauses are grouped into units of thought Ephesians is broken into seventeen units of thought

9 Every unit opens with a structural overview that provides a synopsis for the unitrsquos structure and each summary is followed with a ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo statement

10 An interpretive English translation of Ephesians concludes Ephesians An Ex-egetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching

All ten expectations are intended to help pastors and teachers recall and refresh their previous training in Greek to expand a personrsquos understanding of Koine Greek and to encourage personal engagement with the Greek text Hopefully the

e Clausal Outline 25

process in this book will increase condence in understanding and appreciating Ephesians for preaching and teaching it

Yet Ephesians is not a guide for translation ere are works designed for that task (Larkin Simpson 2015 Merkle) is book is a grammatical-like commentary with interlinear-like English translations of the Greek text that provides exposi-tional commentary-like comments to guide a pastor and teacher in their sermon and teaching preparations

But before delving into examining the ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo in Ephesians it may be helpful to pause dene and illustrate the diamperent types of Greek clauses typical-ly found in the letter

Pauline Independent Clauses

Independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought in a given sentence ere are three types of independent Greek clauses found in the Greek New Testament conjunctive prepositional and asyndetic All three types of independent clauses appear in Ephesians

e rst and most common type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek conjunctive clause is clause is introduced by a Greek conjunction (καί δέ γάρ ἀλλά ἄρα διό οὖν πλήν) Sometimes the Greek conjunction starts the independent clause Other times it appears in a postposi-tive position e independent conjunctive clause dominates Ephesians In fact independent conjunctive clauses appear in Ephesians at least sixty-eight timese following are a few representative samples worthy of mention

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are saved by grace through faith

214a Αὐτὸς γάργάρ ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡmicroῶν214a For he is our peace

219a ἄρα οὖνἄρα οὖν οὐκέτι ἐστὲ ξένοι καὶ πάροικοι219a So then you are no longer strangers and aliens

313a διὸ αἰτοῦmicroαι microὴ ἐγκακεῖν ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσίν microου ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν313a 9erefore I ask that you not be discouraged because of my suampering on your

behalf

41a Παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑmicroᾶς ἐγὼ ὁ δέσmicroιος ἐν κυρίῳ41a 9erefore I a prisoner in the Lord urge you

26 Introduction

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

430a καὶ microὴ λυπεῖτε τὸ πνεῦmicroα τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ430a And do not grieve the Holy Spirit of God

51 γίνεσθε οὖν microιmicroηταὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά51 9erefore be imitators of God as beloved children

533a πλὴνπλὴν καὶ ὑmicroεῖς οἱ καθrsquo ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω533a Nevertheless each of you love your own wife each of you love your own wife

64a Καὶ οἱ πατέρες microὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑmicroῶν64a And fathers do not anger your children

Naturally these Greek conjunctive clauses are independent because they con-tain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneWhile it is not evident above in the pages to follow all independent clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they are independent Each of the independent clauses above begins with a Greek conjunction that makes some sort of connection with a previous clause or transitions to a new thoughtAlso as you can see from the samples above conjunctions sometimes appear in the postpositive position (Eph 28a 14a 41a 20 51) but not always (Eph219a 313a 430a 533a 64a)

e most frequent independent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are those introduced with καί Of the sixty-seven conjunctive independent clauses in Ephesians 35 percent begin with ldquoandrdquo (καί) Even though Paulrsquos favored conjunction is καί ve other Greek conjunctions appear in Ephesians ἀλλά ἄρα οὖν γάρ δέ διό and οὖν e following chart not only lists the Greek conjunction and where they appear in Ephesians it identies how the conjunc-tion has been interpreted semantically in our interpretive English translation for Ephesians

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Ascensive

e conjunction pro-vides a point of focus

ldquoevenrdquo

531c

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 4: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Ephesians 515ndash21 296

Believers should walk in wisdom to understand the will of God because the age is evil and submit to the Holy Spirit with the result that they speak to one another with psalms sing praise to God give thanks always and submit to one another

Ephesians 522ndash33 310

Wives should voluntarily submit to their husbands as they would to the Lord because he is the head husbands should love their wives self-sacrificially as they would care for their own bodies just as Christ loved the church

Ephesians 61ndash4 335

Children should obey and honor their parents fathers should raise their children without provoking them to anger disciplining them and teaching them with Christian instruction

Ephesians 65ndash9 343

Slaves should obey their masters wholeheartedly as if they are serving the Lord himself masters should treat their slaves with the same respect knowing that they also serve the Lord who judges without partialitywithout partialitywithout partiality

Ephesians 610ndash20 354

Believers must empower themselves through prayer by taking ad-vantage of the spiritual provision that God has provided in order to withstand the devil and his attacks on them

Ephesians 621ndash24 374

Paul closes the letter by commending Tychicus a trusted servant who ministers to the church to provide an update of his circum-stances and by praying that God gives them peace love faith and grace

Ephesians Interpretive Translation 381

Figures of Speech in Ephesians 388

Bibliography Bibliography 398

Nugget Index 404

20

Introduction

Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching guides pastors and Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teachingteachers in their understanding on Paulrsquos Greek structure his use of Greek claus-es his Greek syntax and his Greek writing style with this single intention to underscore Paulrsquos numerous big Greek ideas1 Tracing the various big Greek ideas in Ephesians is possible by recognizing Paulrsquos thought process evident in the co-ordination and subordination of the Greek clauses he employs within each of his letters We do not assume that pastors and teachers remember everything learned during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or seminary classes We strive to dene and explain Paulrsquos use of Greek in ways that help pas-tors and teachers recall what was once learned refresh and expand an apprecia-tion for Paulrsquos presentation in Koine Greek and underscore the value to engage the Greek text when preparing to preach and teach Ephesians

We construct the Greek words from Ephesians in 109 independent clauses and 255 dependent clauses and arrange them into clausal outlines Each clause is translated and then explained for interpretive recognition comprehension and communication e clausal outlines represent an early stage in preparing to preach and teach the text2 All the clauses appear in Greek from NA28 along with an interpretive translation for easy usage e clausal outlines make it possible for pastors to visualize the relationship clauses have to one another in order to trace Paulrsquos $ow of thought and ultimately his big idea

Number of Greek Words in Ephesians

Chapter NA28 SBL RP2005 MT THGNT

Ephesians 1 401 401 405 405 402

Ephesians 2 362 362 361 361 362

Ephesians 3 325 324 334 334 325

Ephesians 4 483 482 486 487 482

Ephesians 5 457 455 471 471 457

Ephesians 6 394 393 402 401 394

1 Portions of this work are excerpted from Simpson 2015 used by permission of the Cyber-Center for Biblical Studies

2 For nine steps of exegesis see Bateman 2013

e Clausal Outline 21

The Clausal Outline

e clausal outlines for Ephesians are based on a variety of Greek clauses em-ployed throughout the letter By nature a Greek clause has a subject and a predi-cate which may be a verb a participle or an innitive ey may be independent or dependent Greek clauses Whereas independent clauses can stand alone de-pendent clauses have a subordinate relationship to another clause

Other terminology exists for this same process Mounce (1996 xvindashxxiii) calls it ldquophrasingrdquo Guthrie (Guthrie and Duvall 1998 27ndash42) calls it ldquogrammatical diagramrdquo and MacDonald (1986 145ndash52) calls it ldquotextual transcriptionrdquo While these other works tend to break sentences into clauses and phrases Ephesians concentrates on the clause level As you work your way through the clauses in Paulrsquos letter to the Ephesians you can expect the following

1 Every clause reproduces the Greek text in the exact word order of NA28 even when syntax is less than clear Every attempt is made to make sense of Paulrsquos syntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of clarity

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important struc-tural markers A structural marker is always a verb which may be a verbal (participle or innitive) Other important structural markers are conjunc-tions relative and demonstrative pronouns and a select number of prepo-sitional phrases that introduce clauses Structural markers are always under-lined and oen in bold print For instance

528a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω528a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

e major structural marker is the imperative κλεπτέτω and therefore underlined and in bold type e substantival participle κλέπτων is an im-portant verbal but not the structural maker so the parentheses oampset it for visual purposes

3 Every Greek structural marker serves to distinguish diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses e chart below summarizes the types of in-dependent and dependent Greek clauses found in Ephesians and the means by which they are introduced

22 Introduction

Types (Classications) of Independent and Dependent Clauses3

ree Types of Independent Clauses Four Types of Dependent Clauses

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by simple connective (καί or δέ)

contrastive conjunction (ἀλλά δέ πλήν)

correlative conjunction (microὲν hellip δέ or

καὶ hellip καί)

explanatory conjunction (γάρ) inferential conjunction (ἄρα διό οὖν or

γάρ) or

transitional conjunction (καί δέ or οὖν)

Pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ)

a relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as)

a relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος)

Prepositional clauses are introduced by ldquofor this reasonrdquo (διὰ τοῦτο)

ldquofor this reasonrdquo (ἐπὶ τοῦτο) ldquoas a result of thisrdquo (ἐκ τούτου) ldquowhyrdquo (εἰς τί) or

ldquoin thisrdquo (ἐν τούτῳ)

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by

a subordinate conjunction that denotes seman-tical concepts such as time (ὅτε ὅτον)

reason and cause (διό ὅτι ἐπεί) purpose and result (ἵνα ὥστε) or

comparison (καθώς ὡς ὡσεί ὥσπερ) etc

Participial clauses are introduced by participles

eir objects may be a noun pronoun preposi-tional phrases etc

Asyndeton clauses are not introduced by a conjunctive word or phrase

Innitival clauses are introduced by innitives

4 Every independent Greek clause (the main thought) is placed farthest to the le of the page Dependent Greek clauses that directly modify a Greek word in another clause are either placed in parentheses or positioned under (or above if necessary) the word it modies for easy identication is positioning of a clause visualizes the subordination and coordination of Ephesiansrsquo basic gram-matical and syntactical relationships parallelisms and emphases

5 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has an interpretive English translation provided under the Greek text Every translated structural mark-er is also underlined and oen in bold print for easy recognition use and print for easy recognition use and evaluation

3 W 656ndash65 ere is a diamperence between the chart above and Wallace Whereas the pronominal clause represents both the relative and demonstrative pronoun in the chart on this page Wallace limits the category to a relative pronoun

e Clausal Outline 23

One to Five Exemplied

An example of what to expect is nicely illustrated with a verse from Ephesians 115ndash16

15 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο κἀγὼ ἀκούσαςἀκούσας τὴν καθrsquo ὑmicroᾶς πίστιν ἐν τῷ κυρίῳἸησοῦ καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην τὴν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους

15 For this reason aer hearingaer hearing about your faith in the Lord Jesus aer hearingand your love for all of the saints

16a οὐ παύοmicroαιπαύοmicroαι16a I do not cease

16b εὐχαριστῶνεὐχαριστῶν ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν16b giving thanksgiving thanks on your behalf on your behalf

16c microνείαν ποιούmicroενοςποιούmicroενος ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν microου16c while rememberingremembering you in my prayersremembering

1 e order of the Greek sentence is followed

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important structural markers

3 Every Greek structural marker distinguishes the diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses Ephesians 115ndash16 has three dependent participle Greek clauses verse 16a is an independent conjunctive clause introduced by ∆ιὰ τοῦτοintroduced by

4 e independent clause (ve independent clause (ve independent clause (v 16a) is placed to the extreme le e three de-pendent participle clauses function adverbially modifying the main verbe participles are indented to show their relationship to the main verbSince the adverbial participles are the major structural markers they are clearly identied

5 Every Greek clause has a corresponding English translation and all the translated structural markers are identied for easy recognition

6 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has a corresponding explanato-ry discussion that underscores the grammatical syntactical and semantic func-tions of their respective Greek structural markers that are underlined and oen underlined

24 Introduction

in bold print printbold us not every word within a clause is discussed explanatory discussions major on the structural makers in order to underscore Paulrsquos pointYet if a structural marker is not in bold it is oen for easier visual distinctions

Grammatical Function Grammatical function identies the Greek structural marker as to whether it is pronominal conjunctive a verb or verbal (participle or innitive) If the marker is a verb or verbal it is parsed with an appropriate lexical meaning provided from BDAG If it is pronominal or conjunctive a lexical denition is also provided based upon BDAG

Syntactical Function Syntactical function rst draws attention to the independent or dependent clausersquos type If it is a dependent clause its syn-tactical function within a sentence is underscored All clauses are identi-ed as either substantival adjectival or adverbial as well as the word or words the clause modies

Semantic Function Semantic functions are by nature interpretive sug-gestions whereby a Greek structural marker is explained based upon its literary context Semantic interpretations employ the categories listed and dened in Wallacersquos Greek Grammar beyond the Basics (1996) many of which are discussed in critical commentaries and re$ected in English Bible translations

7 Explanatory discussions about Greek structural markers are interspersed with commentary-like remarks identied as nuggets Numerous text-critical grammatical syntactical structural theological and lexical nuggets appear between clausal presentations that delve deeper into and expand on issues in order to advance your appreciation for Ephesians its readers and its message

8 All independent and dependent Greek clauses are grouped into units of thought Ephesians is broken into seventeen units of thought

9 Every unit opens with a structural overview that provides a synopsis for the unitrsquos structure and each summary is followed with a ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo statement

10 An interpretive English translation of Ephesians concludes Ephesians An Ex-egetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching

All ten expectations are intended to help pastors and teachers recall and refresh their previous training in Greek to expand a personrsquos understanding of Koine Greek and to encourage personal engagement with the Greek text Hopefully the

e Clausal Outline 25

process in this book will increase condence in understanding and appreciating Ephesians for preaching and teaching it

Yet Ephesians is not a guide for translation ere are works designed for that task (Larkin Simpson 2015 Merkle) is book is a grammatical-like commentary with interlinear-like English translations of the Greek text that provides exposi-tional commentary-like comments to guide a pastor and teacher in their sermon and teaching preparations

But before delving into examining the ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo in Ephesians it may be helpful to pause dene and illustrate the diamperent types of Greek clauses typical-ly found in the letter

Pauline Independent Clauses

Independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought in a given sentence ere are three types of independent Greek clauses found in the Greek New Testament conjunctive prepositional and asyndetic All three types of independent clauses appear in Ephesians

e rst and most common type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek conjunctive clause is clause is introduced by a Greek conjunction (καί δέ γάρ ἀλλά ἄρα διό οὖν πλήν) Sometimes the Greek conjunction starts the independent clause Other times it appears in a postposi-tive position e independent conjunctive clause dominates Ephesians In fact independent conjunctive clauses appear in Ephesians at least sixty-eight timese following are a few representative samples worthy of mention

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are saved by grace through faith

214a Αὐτὸς γάργάρ ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡmicroῶν214a For he is our peace

219a ἄρα οὖνἄρα οὖν οὐκέτι ἐστὲ ξένοι καὶ πάροικοι219a So then you are no longer strangers and aliens

313a διὸ αἰτοῦmicroαι microὴ ἐγκακεῖν ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσίν microου ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν313a 9erefore I ask that you not be discouraged because of my suampering on your

behalf

41a Παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑmicroᾶς ἐγὼ ὁ δέσmicroιος ἐν κυρίῳ41a 9erefore I a prisoner in the Lord urge you

26 Introduction

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

430a καὶ microὴ λυπεῖτε τὸ πνεῦmicroα τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ430a And do not grieve the Holy Spirit of God

51 γίνεσθε οὖν microιmicroηταὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά51 9erefore be imitators of God as beloved children

533a πλὴνπλὴν καὶ ὑmicroεῖς οἱ καθrsquo ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω533a Nevertheless each of you love your own wife each of you love your own wife

64a Καὶ οἱ πατέρες microὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑmicroῶν64a And fathers do not anger your children

Naturally these Greek conjunctive clauses are independent because they con-tain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneWhile it is not evident above in the pages to follow all independent clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they are independent Each of the independent clauses above begins with a Greek conjunction that makes some sort of connection with a previous clause or transitions to a new thoughtAlso as you can see from the samples above conjunctions sometimes appear in the postpositive position (Eph 28a 14a 41a 20 51) but not always (Eph219a 313a 430a 533a 64a)

e most frequent independent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are those introduced with καί Of the sixty-seven conjunctive independent clauses in Ephesians 35 percent begin with ldquoandrdquo (καί) Even though Paulrsquos favored conjunction is καί ve other Greek conjunctions appear in Ephesians ἀλλά ἄρα οὖν γάρ δέ διό and οὖν e following chart not only lists the Greek conjunction and where they appear in Ephesians it identies how the conjunc-tion has been interpreted semantically in our interpretive English translation for Ephesians

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Ascensive

e conjunction pro-vides a point of focus

ldquoevenrdquo

531c

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 5: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

20

Introduction

Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching guides pastors and Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teachingteachers in their understanding on Paulrsquos Greek structure his use of Greek claus-es his Greek syntax and his Greek writing style with this single intention to underscore Paulrsquos numerous big Greek ideas1 Tracing the various big Greek ideas in Ephesians is possible by recognizing Paulrsquos thought process evident in the co-ordination and subordination of the Greek clauses he employs within each of his letters We do not assume that pastors and teachers remember everything learned during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or seminary classes We strive to dene and explain Paulrsquos use of Greek in ways that help pas-tors and teachers recall what was once learned refresh and expand an apprecia-tion for Paulrsquos presentation in Koine Greek and underscore the value to engage the Greek text when preparing to preach and teach Ephesians

We construct the Greek words from Ephesians in 109 independent clauses and 255 dependent clauses and arrange them into clausal outlines Each clause is translated and then explained for interpretive recognition comprehension and communication e clausal outlines represent an early stage in preparing to preach and teach the text2 All the clauses appear in Greek from NA28 along with an interpretive translation for easy usage e clausal outlines make it possible for pastors to visualize the relationship clauses have to one another in order to trace Paulrsquos $ow of thought and ultimately his big idea

Number of Greek Words in Ephesians

Chapter NA28 SBL RP2005 MT THGNT

Ephesians 1 401 401 405 405 402

Ephesians 2 362 362 361 361 362

Ephesians 3 325 324 334 334 325

Ephesians 4 483 482 486 487 482

Ephesians 5 457 455 471 471 457

Ephesians 6 394 393 402 401 394

1 Portions of this work are excerpted from Simpson 2015 used by permission of the Cyber-Center for Biblical Studies

2 For nine steps of exegesis see Bateman 2013

e Clausal Outline 21

The Clausal Outline

e clausal outlines for Ephesians are based on a variety of Greek clauses em-ployed throughout the letter By nature a Greek clause has a subject and a predi-cate which may be a verb a participle or an innitive ey may be independent or dependent Greek clauses Whereas independent clauses can stand alone de-pendent clauses have a subordinate relationship to another clause

Other terminology exists for this same process Mounce (1996 xvindashxxiii) calls it ldquophrasingrdquo Guthrie (Guthrie and Duvall 1998 27ndash42) calls it ldquogrammatical diagramrdquo and MacDonald (1986 145ndash52) calls it ldquotextual transcriptionrdquo While these other works tend to break sentences into clauses and phrases Ephesians concentrates on the clause level As you work your way through the clauses in Paulrsquos letter to the Ephesians you can expect the following

1 Every clause reproduces the Greek text in the exact word order of NA28 even when syntax is less than clear Every attempt is made to make sense of Paulrsquos syntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of clarity

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important struc-tural markers A structural marker is always a verb which may be a verbal (participle or innitive) Other important structural markers are conjunc-tions relative and demonstrative pronouns and a select number of prepo-sitional phrases that introduce clauses Structural markers are always under-lined and oen in bold print For instance

528a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω528a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

e major structural marker is the imperative κλεπτέτω and therefore underlined and in bold type e substantival participle κλέπτων is an im-portant verbal but not the structural maker so the parentheses oampset it for visual purposes

3 Every Greek structural marker serves to distinguish diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses e chart below summarizes the types of in-dependent and dependent Greek clauses found in Ephesians and the means by which they are introduced

22 Introduction

Types (Classications) of Independent and Dependent Clauses3

ree Types of Independent Clauses Four Types of Dependent Clauses

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by simple connective (καί or δέ)

contrastive conjunction (ἀλλά δέ πλήν)

correlative conjunction (microὲν hellip δέ or

καὶ hellip καί)

explanatory conjunction (γάρ) inferential conjunction (ἄρα διό οὖν or

γάρ) or

transitional conjunction (καί δέ or οὖν)

Pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ)

a relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as)

a relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος)

Prepositional clauses are introduced by ldquofor this reasonrdquo (διὰ τοῦτο)

ldquofor this reasonrdquo (ἐπὶ τοῦτο) ldquoas a result of thisrdquo (ἐκ τούτου) ldquowhyrdquo (εἰς τί) or

ldquoin thisrdquo (ἐν τούτῳ)

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by

a subordinate conjunction that denotes seman-tical concepts such as time (ὅτε ὅτον)

reason and cause (διό ὅτι ἐπεί) purpose and result (ἵνα ὥστε) or

comparison (καθώς ὡς ὡσεί ὥσπερ) etc

Participial clauses are introduced by participles

eir objects may be a noun pronoun preposi-tional phrases etc

Asyndeton clauses are not introduced by a conjunctive word or phrase

Innitival clauses are introduced by innitives

4 Every independent Greek clause (the main thought) is placed farthest to the le of the page Dependent Greek clauses that directly modify a Greek word in another clause are either placed in parentheses or positioned under (or above if necessary) the word it modies for easy identication is positioning of a clause visualizes the subordination and coordination of Ephesiansrsquo basic gram-matical and syntactical relationships parallelisms and emphases

5 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has an interpretive English translation provided under the Greek text Every translated structural mark-er is also underlined and oen in bold print for easy recognition use and print for easy recognition use and evaluation

3 W 656ndash65 ere is a diamperence between the chart above and Wallace Whereas the pronominal clause represents both the relative and demonstrative pronoun in the chart on this page Wallace limits the category to a relative pronoun

e Clausal Outline 23

One to Five Exemplied

An example of what to expect is nicely illustrated with a verse from Ephesians 115ndash16

15 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο κἀγὼ ἀκούσαςἀκούσας τὴν καθrsquo ὑmicroᾶς πίστιν ἐν τῷ κυρίῳἸησοῦ καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην τὴν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους

15 For this reason aer hearingaer hearing about your faith in the Lord Jesus aer hearingand your love for all of the saints

16a οὐ παύοmicroαιπαύοmicroαι16a I do not cease

16b εὐχαριστῶνεὐχαριστῶν ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν16b giving thanksgiving thanks on your behalf on your behalf

16c microνείαν ποιούmicroενοςποιούmicroενος ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν microου16c while rememberingremembering you in my prayersremembering

1 e order of the Greek sentence is followed

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important structural markers

3 Every Greek structural marker distinguishes the diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses Ephesians 115ndash16 has three dependent participle Greek clauses verse 16a is an independent conjunctive clause introduced by ∆ιὰ τοῦτοintroduced by

4 e independent clause (ve independent clause (ve independent clause (v 16a) is placed to the extreme le e three de-pendent participle clauses function adverbially modifying the main verbe participles are indented to show their relationship to the main verbSince the adverbial participles are the major structural markers they are clearly identied

5 Every Greek clause has a corresponding English translation and all the translated structural markers are identied for easy recognition

6 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has a corresponding explanato-ry discussion that underscores the grammatical syntactical and semantic func-tions of their respective Greek structural markers that are underlined and oen underlined

24 Introduction

in bold print printbold us not every word within a clause is discussed explanatory discussions major on the structural makers in order to underscore Paulrsquos pointYet if a structural marker is not in bold it is oen for easier visual distinctions

Grammatical Function Grammatical function identies the Greek structural marker as to whether it is pronominal conjunctive a verb or verbal (participle or innitive) If the marker is a verb or verbal it is parsed with an appropriate lexical meaning provided from BDAG If it is pronominal or conjunctive a lexical denition is also provided based upon BDAG

Syntactical Function Syntactical function rst draws attention to the independent or dependent clausersquos type If it is a dependent clause its syn-tactical function within a sentence is underscored All clauses are identi-ed as either substantival adjectival or adverbial as well as the word or words the clause modies

Semantic Function Semantic functions are by nature interpretive sug-gestions whereby a Greek structural marker is explained based upon its literary context Semantic interpretations employ the categories listed and dened in Wallacersquos Greek Grammar beyond the Basics (1996) many of which are discussed in critical commentaries and re$ected in English Bible translations

7 Explanatory discussions about Greek structural markers are interspersed with commentary-like remarks identied as nuggets Numerous text-critical grammatical syntactical structural theological and lexical nuggets appear between clausal presentations that delve deeper into and expand on issues in order to advance your appreciation for Ephesians its readers and its message

8 All independent and dependent Greek clauses are grouped into units of thought Ephesians is broken into seventeen units of thought

9 Every unit opens with a structural overview that provides a synopsis for the unitrsquos structure and each summary is followed with a ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo statement

10 An interpretive English translation of Ephesians concludes Ephesians An Ex-egetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching

All ten expectations are intended to help pastors and teachers recall and refresh their previous training in Greek to expand a personrsquos understanding of Koine Greek and to encourage personal engagement with the Greek text Hopefully the

e Clausal Outline 25

process in this book will increase condence in understanding and appreciating Ephesians for preaching and teaching it

Yet Ephesians is not a guide for translation ere are works designed for that task (Larkin Simpson 2015 Merkle) is book is a grammatical-like commentary with interlinear-like English translations of the Greek text that provides exposi-tional commentary-like comments to guide a pastor and teacher in their sermon and teaching preparations

But before delving into examining the ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo in Ephesians it may be helpful to pause dene and illustrate the diamperent types of Greek clauses typical-ly found in the letter

Pauline Independent Clauses

Independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought in a given sentence ere are three types of independent Greek clauses found in the Greek New Testament conjunctive prepositional and asyndetic All three types of independent clauses appear in Ephesians

e rst and most common type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek conjunctive clause is clause is introduced by a Greek conjunction (καί δέ γάρ ἀλλά ἄρα διό οὖν πλήν) Sometimes the Greek conjunction starts the independent clause Other times it appears in a postposi-tive position e independent conjunctive clause dominates Ephesians In fact independent conjunctive clauses appear in Ephesians at least sixty-eight timese following are a few representative samples worthy of mention

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are saved by grace through faith

214a Αὐτὸς γάργάρ ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡmicroῶν214a For he is our peace

219a ἄρα οὖνἄρα οὖν οὐκέτι ἐστὲ ξένοι καὶ πάροικοι219a So then you are no longer strangers and aliens

313a διὸ αἰτοῦmicroαι microὴ ἐγκακεῖν ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσίν microου ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν313a 9erefore I ask that you not be discouraged because of my suampering on your

behalf

41a Παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑmicroᾶς ἐγὼ ὁ δέσmicroιος ἐν κυρίῳ41a 9erefore I a prisoner in the Lord urge you

26 Introduction

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

430a καὶ microὴ λυπεῖτε τὸ πνεῦmicroα τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ430a And do not grieve the Holy Spirit of God

51 γίνεσθε οὖν microιmicroηταὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά51 9erefore be imitators of God as beloved children

533a πλὴνπλὴν καὶ ὑmicroεῖς οἱ καθrsquo ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω533a Nevertheless each of you love your own wife each of you love your own wife

64a Καὶ οἱ πατέρες microὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑmicroῶν64a And fathers do not anger your children

Naturally these Greek conjunctive clauses are independent because they con-tain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneWhile it is not evident above in the pages to follow all independent clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they are independent Each of the independent clauses above begins with a Greek conjunction that makes some sort of connection with a previous clause or transitions to a new thoughtAlso as you can see from the samples above conjunctions sometimes appear in the postpositive position (Eph 28a 14a 41a 20 51) but not always (Eph219a 313a 430a 533a 64a)

e most frequent independent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are those introduced with καί Of the sixty-seven conjunctive independent clauses in Ephesians 35 percent begin with ldquoandrdquo (καί) Even though Paulrsquos favored conjunction is καί ve other Greek conjunctions appear in Ephesians ἀλλά ἄρα οὖν γάρ δέ διό and οὖν e following chart not only lists the Greek conjunction and where they appear in Ephesians it identies how the conjunc-tion has been interpreted semantically in our interpretive English translation for Ephesians

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Ascensive

e conjunction pro-vides a point of focus

ldquoevenrdquo

531c

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 6: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 21

The Clausal Outline

e clausal outlines for Ephesians are based on a variety of Greek clauses em-ployed throughout the letter By nature a Greek clause has a subject and a predi-cate which may be a verb a participle or an innitive ey may be independent or dependent Greek clauses Whereas independent clauses can stand alone de-pendent clauses have a subordinate relationship to another clause

Other terminology exists for this same process Mounce (1996 xvindashxxiii) calls it ldquophrasingrdquo Guthrie (Guthrie and Duvall 1998 27ndash42) calls it ldquogrammatical diagramrdquo and MacDonald (1986 145ndash52) calls it ldquotextual transcriptionrdquo While these other works tend to break sentences into clauses and phrases Ephesians concentrates on the clause level As you work your way through the clauses in Paulrsquos letter to the Ephesians you can expect the following

1 Every clause reproduces the Greek text in the exact word order of NA28 even when syntax is less than clear Every attempt is made to make sense of Paulrsquos syntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of claritysyntax in Ephesians regardless of the occasional lack of clarity

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important struc-tural markers A structural marker is always a verb which may be a verbal (participle or innitive) Other important structural markers are conjunc-tions relative and demonstrative pronouns and a select number of prepo-sitional phrases that introduce clauses Structural markers are always under-lined and oen in bold print For instance

528a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω528a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

e major structural marker is the imperative κλεπτέτω and therefore underlined and in bold type e substantival participle κλέπτων is an im-portant verbal but not the structural maker so the parentheses oampset it for visual purposes

3 Every Greek structural marker serves to distinguish diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses e chart below summarizes the types of in-dependent and dependent Greek clauses found in Ephesians and the means by which they are introduced

22 Introduction

Types (Classications) of Independent and Dependent Clauses3

ree Types of Independent Clauses Four Types of Dependent Clauses

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by simple connective (καί or δέ)

contrastive conjunction (ἀλλά δέ πλήν)

correlative conjunction (microὲν hellip δέ or

καὶ hellip καί)

explanatory conjunction (γάρ) inferential conjunction (ἄρα διό οὖν or

γάρ) or

transitional conjunction (καί δέ or οὖν)

Pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ)

a relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as)

a relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος)

Prepositional clauses are introduced by ldquofor this reasonrdquo (διὰ τοῦτο)

ldquofor this reasonrdquo (ἐπὶ τοῦτο) ldquoas a result of thisrdquo (ἐκ τούτου) ldquowhyrdquo (εἰς τί) or

ldquoin thisrdquo (ἐν τούτῳ)

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by

a subordinate conjunction that denotes seman-tical concepts such as time (ὅτε ὅτον)

reason and cause (διό ὅτι ἐπεί) purpose and result (ἵνα ὥστε) or

comparison (καθώς ὡς ὡσεί ὥσπερ) etc

Participial clauses are introduced by participles

eir objects may be a noun pronoun preposi-tional phrases etc

Asyndeton clauses are not introduced by a conjunctive word or phrase

Innitival clauses are introduced by innitives

4 Every independent Greek clause (the main thought) is placed farthest to the le of the page Dependent Greek clauses that directly modify a Greek word in another clause are either placed in parentheses or positioned under (or above if necessary) the word it modies for easy identication is positioning of a clause visualizes the subordination and coordination of Ephesiansrsquo basic gram-matical and syntactical relationships parallelisms and emphases

5 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has an interpretive English translation provided under the Greek text Every translated structural mark-er is also underlined and oen in bold print for easy recognition use and print for easy recognition use and evaluation

3 W 656ndash65 ere is a diamperence between the chart above and Wallace Whereas the pronominal clause represents both the relative and demonstrative pronoun in the chart on this page Wallace limits the category to a relative pronoun

e Clausal Outline 23

One to Five Exemplied

An example of what to expect is nicely illustrated with a verse from Ephesians 115ndash16

15 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο κἀγὼ ἀκούσαςἀκούσας τὴν καθrsquo ὑmicroᾶς πίστιν ἐν τῷ κυρίῳἸησοῦ καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην τὴν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους

15 For this reason aer hearingaer hearing about your faith in the Lord Jesus aer hearingand your love for all of the saints

16a οὐ παύοmicroαιπαύοmicroαι16a I do not cease

16b εὐχαριστῶνεὐχαριστῶν ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν16b giving thanksgiving thanks on your behalf on your behalf

16c microνείαν ποιούmicroενοςποιούmicroενος ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν microου16c while rememberingremembering you in my prayersremembering

1 e order of the Greek sentence is followed

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important structural markers

3 Every Greek structural marker distinguishes the diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses Ephesians 115ndash16 has three dependent participle Greek clauses verse 16a is an independent conjunctive clause introduced by ∆ιὰ τοῦτοintroduced by

4 e independent clause (ve independent clause (ve independent clause (v 16a) is placed to the extreme le e three de-pendent participle clauses function adverbially modifying the main verbe participles are indented to show their relationship to the main verbSince the adverbial participles are the major structural markers they are clearly identied

5 Every Greek clause has a corresponding English translation and all the translated structural markers are identied for easy recognition

6 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has a corresponding explanato-ry discussion that underscores the grammatical syntactical and semantic func-tions of their respective Greek structural markers that are underlined and oen underlined

24 Introduction

in bold print printbold us not every word within a clause is discussed explanatory discussions major on the structural makers in order to underscore Paulrsquos pointYet if a structural marker is not in bold it is oen for easier visual distinctions

Grammatical Function Grammatical function identies the Greek structural marker as to whether it is pronominal conjunctive a verb or verbal (participle or innitive) If the marker is a verb or verbal it is parsed with an appropriate lexical meaning provided from BDAG If it is pronominal or conjunctive a lexical denition is also provided based upon BDAG

Syntactical Function Syntactical function rst draws attention to the independent or dependent clausersquos type If it is a dependent clause its syn-tactical function within a sentence is underscored All clauses are identi-ed as either substantival adjectival or adverbial as well as the word or words the clause modies

Semantic Function Semantic functions are by nature interpretive sug-gestions whereby a Greek structural marker is explained based upon its literary context Semantic interpretations employ the categories listed and dened in Wallacersquos Greek Grammar beyond the Basics (1996) many of which are discussed in critical commentaries and re$ected in English Bible translations

7 Explanatory discussions about Greek structural markers are interspersed with commentary-like remarks identied as nuggets Numerous text-critical grammatical syntactical structural theological and lexical nuggets appear between clausal presentations that delve deeper into and expand on issues in order to advance your appreciation for Ephesians its readers and its message

8 All independent and dependent Greek clauses are grouped into units of thought Ephesians is broken into seventeen units of thought

9 Every unit opens with a structural overview that provides a synopsis for the unitrsquos structure and each summary is followed with a ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo statement

10 An interpretive English translation of Ephesians concludes Ephesians An Ex-egetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching

All ten expectations are intended to help pastors and teachers recall and refresh their previous training in Greek to expand a personrsquos understanding of Koine Greek and to encourage personal engagement with the Greek text Hopefully the

e Clausal Outline 25

process in this book will increase condence in understanding and appreciating Ephesians for preaching and teaching it

Yet Ephesians is not a guide for translation ere are works designed for that task (Larkin Simpson 2015 Merkle) is book is a grammatical-like commentary with interlinear-like English translations of the Greek text that provides exposi-tional commentary-like comments to guide a pastor and teacher in their sermon and teaching preparations

But before delving into examining the ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo in Ephesians it may be helpful to pause dene and illustrate the diamperent types of Greek clauses typical-ly found in the letter

Pauline Independent Clauses

Independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought in a given sentence ere are three types of independent Greek clauses found in the Greek New Testament conjunctive prepositional and asyndetic All three types of independent clauses appear in Ephesians

e rst and most common type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek conjunctive clause is clause is introduced by a Greek conjunction (καί δέ γάρ ἀλλά ἄρα διό οὖν πλήν) Sometimes the Greek conjunction starts the independent clause Other times it appears in a postposi-tive position e independent conjunctive clause dominates Ephesians In fact independent conjunctive clauses appear in Ephesians at least sixty-eight timese following are a few representative samples worthy of mention

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are saved by grace through faith

214a Αὐτὸς γάργάρ ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡmicroῶν214a For he is our peace

219a ἄρα οὖνἄρα οὖν οὐκέτι ἐστὲ ξένοι καὶ πάροικοι219a So then you are no longer strangers and aliens

313a διὸ αἰτοῦmicroαι microὴ ἐγκακεῖν ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσίν microου ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν313a 9erefore I ask that you not be discouraged because of my suampering on your

behalf

41a Παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑmicroᾶς ἐγὼ ὁ δέσmicroιος ἐν κυρίῳ41a 9erefore I a prisoner in the Lord urge you

26 Introduction

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

430a καὶ microὴ λυπεῖτε τὸ πνεῦmicroα τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ430a And do not grieve the Holy Spirit of God

51 γίνεσθε οὖν microιmicroηταὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά51 9erefore be imitators of God as beloved children

533a πλὴνπλὴν καὶ ὑmicroεῖς οἱ καθrsquo ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω533a Nevertheless each of you love your own wife each of you love your own wife

64a Καὶ οἱ πατέρες microὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑmicroῶν64a And fathers do not anger your children

Naturally these Greek conjunctive clauses are independent because they con-tain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneWhile it is not evident above in the pages to follow all independent clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they are independent Each of the independent clauses above begins with a Greek conjunction that makes some sort of connection with a previous clause or transitions to a new thoughtAlso as you can see from the samples above conjunctions sometimes appear in the postpositive position (Eph 28a 14a 41a 20 51) but not always (Eph219a 313a 430a 533a 64a)

e most frequent independent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are those introduced with καί Of the sixty-seven conjunctive independent clauses in Ephesians 35 percent begin with ldquoandrdquo (καί) Even though Paulrsquos favored conjunction is καί ve other Greek conjunctions appear in Ephesians ἀλλά ἄρα οὖν γάρ δέ διό and οὖν e following chart not only lists the Greek conjunction and where they appear in Ephesians it identies how the conjunc-tion has been interpreted semantically in our interpretive English translation for Ephesians

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Ascensive

e conjunction pro-vides a point of focus

ldquoevenrdquo

531c

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 7: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

22 Introduction

Types (Classications) of Independent and Dependent Clauses3

ree Types of Independent Clauses Four Types of Dependent Clauses

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by simple connective (καί or δέ)

contrastive conjunction (ἀλλά δέ πλήν)

correlative conjunction (microὲν hellip δέ or

καὶ hellip καί)

explanatory conjunction (γάρ) inferential conjunction (ἄρα διό οὖν or

γάρ) or

transitional conjunction (καί δέ or οὖν)

Pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ)

a relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as)

a relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος)

Prepositional clauses are introduced by ldquofor this reasonrdquo (διὰ τοῦτο)

ldquofor this reasonrdquo (ἐπὶ τοῦτο) ldquoas a result of thisrdquo (ἐκ τούτου) ldquowhyrdquo (εἰς τί) or

ldquoin thisrdquo (ἐν τούτῳ)

Conjunctive clauses are introduced by

a subordinate conjunction that denotes seman-tical concepts such as time (ὅτε ὅτον)

reason and cause (διό ὅτι ἐπεί) purpose and result (ἵνα ὥστε) or

comparison (καθώς ὡς ὡσεί ὥσπερ) etc

Participial clauses are introduced by participles

eir objects may be a noun pronoun preposi-tional phrases etc

Asyndeton clauses are not introduced by a conjunctive word or phrase

Innitival clauses are introduced by innitives

4 Every independent Greek clause (the main thought) is placed farthest to the le of the page Dependent Greek clauses that directly modify a Greek word in another clause are either placed in parentheses or positioned under (or above if necessary) the word it modies for easy identication is positioning of a clause visualizes the subordination and coordination of Ephesiansrsquo basic gram-matical and syntactical relationships parallelisms and emphases

5 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has an interpretive English translation provided under the Greek text Every translated structural mark-er is also underlined and oen in bold print for easy recognition use and print for easy recognition use and evaluation

3 W 656ndash65 ere is a diamperence between the chart above and Wallace Whereas the pronominal clause represents both the relative and demonstrative pronoun in the chart on this page Wallace limits the category to a relative pronoun

e Clausal Outline 23

One to Five Exemplied

An example of what to expect is nicely illustrated with a verse from Ephesians 115ndash16

15 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο κἀγὼ ἀκούσαςἀκούσας τὴν καθrsquo ὑmicroᾶς πίστιν ἐν τῷ κυρίῳἸησοῦ καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην τὴν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους

15 For this reason aer hearingaer hearing about your faith in the Lord Jesus aer hearingand your love for all of the saints

16a οὐ παύοmicroαιπαύοmicroαι16a I do not cease

16b εὐχαριστῶνεὐχαριστῶν ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν16b giving thanksgiving thanks on your behalf on your behalf

16c microνείαν ποιούmicroενοςποιούmicroενος ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν microου16c while rememberingremembering you in my prayersremembering

1 e order of the Greek sentence is followed

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important structural markers

3 Every Greek structural marker distinguishes the diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses Ephesians 115ndash16 has three dependent participle Greek clauses verse 16a is an independent conjunctive clause introduced by ∆ιὰ τοῦτοintroduced by

4 e independent clause (ve independent clause (ve independent clause (v 16a) is placed to the extreme le e three de-pendent participle clauses function adverbially modifying the main verbe participles are indented to show their relationship to the main verbSince the adverbial participles are the major structural markers they are clearly identied

5 Every Greek clause has a corresponding English translation and all the translated structural markers are identied for easy recognition

6 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has a corresponding explanato-ry discussion that underscores the grammatical syntactical and semantic func-tions of their respective Greek structural markers that are underlined and oen underlined

24 Introduction

in bold print printbold us not every word within a clause is discussed explanatory discussions major on the structural makers in order to underscore Paulrsquos pointYet if a structural marker is not in bold it is oen for easier visual distinctions

Grammatical Function Grammatical function identies the Greek structural marker as to whether it is pronominal conjunctive a verb or verbal (participle or innitive) If the marker is a verb or verbal it is parsed with an appropriate lexical meaning provided from BDAG If it is pronominal or conjunctive a lexical denition is also provided based upon BDAG

Syntactical Function Syntactical function rst draws attention to the independent or dependent clausersquos type If it is a dependent clause its syn-tactical function within a sentence is underscored All clauses are identi-ed as either substantival adjectival or adverbial as well as the word or words the clause modies

Semantic Function Semantic functions are by nature interpretive sug-gestions whereby a Greek structural marker is explained based upon its literary context Semantic interpretations employ the categories listed and dened in Wallacersquos Greek Grammar beyond the Basics (1996) many of which are discussed in critical commentaries and re$ected in English Bible translations

7 Explanatory discussions about Greek structural markers are interspersed with commentary-like remarks identied as nuggets Numerous text-critical grammatical syntactical structural theological and lexical nuggets appear between clausal presentations that delve deeper into and expand on issues in order to advance your appreciation for Ephesians its readers and its message

8 All independent and dependent Greek clauses are grouped into units of thought Ephesians is broken into seventeen units of thought

9 Every unit opens with a structural overview that provides a synopsis for the unitrsquos structure and each summary is followed with a ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo statement

10 An interpretive English translation of Ephesians concludes Ephesians An Ex-egetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching

All ten expectations are intended to help pastors and teachers recall and refresh their previous training in Greek to expand a personrsquos understanding of Koine Greek and to encourage personal engagement with the Greek text Hopefully the

e Clausal Outline 25

process in this book will increase condence in understanding and appreciating Ephesians for preaching and teaching it

Yet Ephesians is not a guide for translation ere are works designed for that task (Larkin Simpson 2015 Merkle) is book is a grammatical-like commentary with interlinear-like English translations of the Greek text that provides exposi-tional commentary-like comments to guide a pastor and teacher in their sermon and teaching preparations

But before delving into examining the ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo in Ephesians it may be helpful to pause dene and illustrate the diamperent types of Greek clauses typical-ly found in the letter

Pauline Independent Clauses

Independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought in a given sentence ere are three types of independent Greek clauses found in the Greek New Testament conjunctive prepositional and asyndetic All three types of independent clauses appear in Ephesians

e rst and most common type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek conjunctive clause is clause is introduced by a Greek conjunction (καί δέ γάρ ἀλλά ἄρα διό οὖν πλήν) Sometimes the Greek conjunction starts the independent clause Other times it appears in a postposi-tive position e independent conjunctive clause dominates Ephesians In fact independent conjunctive clauses appear in Ephesians at least sixty-eight timese following are a few representative samples worthy of mention

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are saved by grace through faith

214a Αὐτὸς γάργάρ ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡmicroῶν214a For he is our peace

219a ἄρα οὖνἄρα οὖν οὐκέτι ἐστὲ ξένοι καὶ πάροικοι219a So then you are no longer strangers and aliens

313a διὸ αἰτοῦmicroαι microὴ ἐγκακεῖν ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσίν microου ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν313a 9erefore I ask that you not be discouraged because of my suampering on your

behalf

41a Παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑmicroᾶς ἐγὼ ὁ δέσmicroιος ἐν κυρίῳ41a 9erefore I a prisoner in the Lord urge you

26 Introduction

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

430a καὶ microὴ λυπεῖτε τὸ πνεῦmicroα τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ430a And do not grieve the Holy Spirit of God

51 γίνεσθε οὖν microιmicroηταὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά51 9erefore be imitators of God as beloved children

533a πλὴνπλὴν καὶ ὑmicroεῖς οἱ καθrsquo ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω533a Nevertheless each of you love your own wife each of you love your own wife

64a Καὶ οἱ πατέρες microὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑmicroῶν64a And fathers do not anger your children

Naturally these Greek conjunctive clauses are independent because they con-tain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneWhile it is not evident above in the pages to follow all independent clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they are independent Each of the independent clauses above begins with a Greek conjunction that makes some sort of connection with a previous clause or transitions to a new thoughtAlso as you can see from the samples above conjunctions sometimes appear in the postpositive position (Eph 28a 14a 41a 20 51) but not always (Eph219a 313a 430a 533a 64a)

e most frequent independent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are those introduced with καί Of the sixty-seven conjunctive independent clauses in Ephesians 35 percent begin with ldquoandrdquo (καί) Even though Paulrsquos favored conjunction is καί ve other Greek conjunctions appear in Ephesians ἀλλά ἄρα οὖν γάρ δέ διό and οὖν e following chart not only lists the Greek conjunction and where they appear in Ephesians it identies how the conjunc-tion has been interpreted semantically in our interpretive English translation for Ephesians

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Ascensive

e conjunction pro-vides a point of focus

ldquoevenrdquo

531c

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 8: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 23

One to Five Exemplied

An example of what to expect is nicely illustrated with a verse from Ephesians 115ndash16

15 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο κἀγὼ ἀκούσαςἀκούσας τὴν καθrsquo ὑmicroᾶς πίστιν ἐν τῷ κυρίῳἸησοῦ καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην τὴν εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους

15 For this reason aer hearingaer hearing about your faith in the Lord Jesus aer hearingand your love for all of the saints

16a οὐ παύοmicroαιπαύοmicroαι16a I do not cease

16b εὐχαριστῶνεὐχαριστῶν ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν16b giving thanksgiving thanks on your behalf on your behalf

16c microνείαν ποιούmicroενοςποιούmicroενος ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν microου16c while rememberingremembering you in my prayersremembering

1 e order of the Greek sentence is followed

2 Every Greek clause underscores the Greek words deemed as important structural markers

3 Every Greek structural marker distinguishes the diamperent types of inde-pendent and dependent clauses Ephesians 115ndash16 has three dependent participle Greek clauses verse 16a is an independent conjunctive clause introduced by ∆ιὰ τοῦτοintroduced by

4 e independent clause (ve independent clause (ve independent clause (v 16a) is placed to the extreme le e three de-pendent participle clauses function adverbially modifying the main verbe participles are indented to show their relationship to the main verbSince the adverbial participles are the major structural markers they are clearly identied

5 Every Greek clause has a corresponding English translation and all the translated structural markers are identied for easy recognition

6 Every independent and dependent Greek clause has a corresponding explanato-ry discussion that underscores the grammatical syntactical and semantic func-tions of their respective Greek structural markers that are underlined and oen underlined

24 Introduction

in bold print printbold us not every word within a clause is discussed explanatory discussions major on the structural makers in order to underscore Paulrsquos pointYet if a structural marker is not in bold it is oen for easier visual distinctions

Grammatical Function Grammatical function identies the Greek structural marker as to whether it is pronominal conjunctive a verb or verbal (participle or innitive) If the marker is a verb or verbal it is parsed with an appropriate lexical meaning provided from BDAG If it is pronominal or conjunctive a lexical denition is also provided based upon BDAG

Syntactical Function Syntactical function rst draws attention to the independent or dependent clausersquos type If it is a dependent clause its syn-tactical function within a sentence is underscored All clauses are identi-ed as either substantival adjectival or adverbial as well as the word or words the clause modies

Semantic Function Semantic functions are by nature interpretive sug-gestions whereby a Greek structural marker is explained based upon its literary context Semantic interpretations employ the categories listed and dened in Wallacersquos Greek Grammar beyond the Basics (1996) many of which are discussed in critical commentaries and re$ected in English Bible translations

7 Explanatory discussions about Greek structural markers are interspersed with commentary-like remarks identied as nuggets Numerous text-critical grammatical syntactical structural theological and lexical nuggets appear between clausal presentations that delve deeper into and expand on issues in order to advance your appreciation for Ephesians its readers and its message

8 All independent and dependent Greek clauses are grouped into units of thought Ephesians is broken into seventeen units of thought

9 Every unit opens with a structural overview that provides a synopsis for the unitrsquos structure and each summary is followed with a ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo statement

10 An interpretive English translation of Ephesians concludes Ephesians An Ex-egetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching

All ten expectations are intended to help pastors and teachers recall and refresh their previous training in Greek to expand a personrsquos understanding of Koine Greek and to encourage personal engagement with the Greek text Hopefully the

e Clausal Outline 25

process in this book will increase condence in understanding and appreciating Ephesians for preaching and teaching it

Yet Ephesians is not a guide for translation ere are works designed for that task (Larkin Simpson 2015 Merkle) is book is a grammatical-like commentary with interlinear-like English translations of the Greek text that provides exposi-tional commentary-like comments to guide a pastor and teacher in their sermon and teaching preparations

But before delving into examining the ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo in Ephesians it may be helpful to pause dene and illustrate the diamperent types of Greek clauses typical-ly found in the letter

Pauline Independent Clauses

Independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought in a given sentence ere are three types of independent Greek clauses found in the Greek New Testament conjunctive prepositional and asyndetic All three types of independent clauses appear in Ephesians

e rst and most common type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek conjunctive clause is clause is introduced by a Greek conjunction (καί δέ γάρ ἀλλά ἄρα διό οὖν πλήν) Sometimes the Greek conjunction starts the independent clause Other times it appears in a postposi-tive position e independent conjunctive clause dominates Ephesians In fact independent conjunctive clauses appear in Ephesians at least sixty-eight timese following are a few representative samples worthy of mention

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are saved by grace through faith

214a Αὐτὸς γάργάρ ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡmicroῶν214a For he is our peace

219a ἄρα οὖνἄρα οὖν οὐκέτι ἐστὲ ξένοι καὶ πάροικοι219a So then you are no longer strangers and aliens

313a διὸ αἰτοῦmicroαι microὴ ἐγκακεῖν ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσίν microου ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν313a 9erefore I ask that you not be discouraged because of my suampering on your

behalf

41a Παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑmicroᾶς ἐγὼ ὁ δέσmicroιος ἐν κυρίῳ41a 9erefore I a prisoner in the Lord urge you

26 Introduction

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

430a καὶ microὴ λυπεῖτε τὸ πνεῦmicroα τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ430a And do not grieve the Holy Spirit of God

51 γίνεσθε οὖν microιmicroηταὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά51 9erefore be imitators of God as beloved children

533a πλὴνπλὴν καὶ ὑmicroεῖς οἱ καθrsquo ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω533a Nevertheless each of you love your own wife each of you love your own wife

64a Καὶ οἱ πατέρες microὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑmicroῶν64a And fathers do not anger your children

Naturally these Greek conjunctive clauses are independent because they con-tain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneWhile it is not evident above in the pages to follow all independent clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they are independent Each of the independent clauses above begins with a Greek conjunction that makes some sort of connection with a previous clause or transitions to a new thoughtAlso as you can see from the samples above conjunctions sometimes appear in the postpositive position (Eph 28a 14a 41a 20 51) but not always (Eph219a 313a 430a 533a 64a)

e most frequent independent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are those introduced with καί Of the sixty-seven conjunctive independent clauses in Ephesians 35 percent begin with ldquoandrdquo (καί) Even though Paulrsquos favored conjunction is καί ve other Greek conjunctions appear in Ephesians ἀλλά ἄρα οὖν γάρ δέ διό and οὖν e following chart not only lists the Greek conjunction and where they appear in Ephesians it identies how the conjunc-tion has been interpreted semantically in our interpretive English translation for Ephesians

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Ascensive

e conjunction pro-vides a point of focus

ldquoevenrdquo

531c

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 9: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

24 Introduction

in bold print printbold us not every word within a clause is discussed explanatory discussions major on the structural makers in order to underscore Paulrsquos pointYet if a structural marker is not in bold it is oen for easier visual distinctions

Grammatical Function Grammatical function identies the Greek structural marker as to whether it is pronominal conjunctive a verb or verbal (participle or innitive) If the marker is a verb or verbal it is parsed with an appropriate lexical meaning provided from BDAG If it is pronominal or conjunctive a lexical denition is also provided based upon BDAG

Syntactical Function Syntactical function rst draws attention to the independent or dependent clausersquos type If it is a dependent clause its syn-tactical function within a sentence is underscored All clauses are identi-ed as either substantival adjectival or adverbial as well as the word or words the clause modies

Semantic Function Semantic functions are by nature interpretive sug-gestions whereby a Greek structural marker is explained based upon its literary context Semantic interpretations employ the categories listed and dened in Wallacersquos Greek Grammar beyond the Basics (1996) many of which are discussed in critical commentaries and re$ected in English Bible translations

7 Explanatory discussions about Greek structural markers are interspersed with commentary-like remarks identied as nuggets Numerous text-critical grammatical syntactical structural theological and lexical nuggets appear between clausal presentations that delve deeper into and expand on issues in order to advance your appreciation for Ephesians its readers and its message

8 All independent and dependent Greek clauses are grouped into units of thought Ephesians is broken into seventeen units of thought

9 Every unit opens with a structural overview that provides a synopsis for the unitrsquos structure and each summary is followed with a ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo statement

10 An interpretive English translation of Ephesians concludes Ephesians An Ex-egetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching

All ten expectations are intended to help pastors and teachers recall and refresh their previous training in Greek to expand a personrsquos understanding of Koine Greek and to encourage personal engagement with the Greek text Hopefully the

e Clausal Outline 25

process in this book will increase condence in understanding and appreciating Ephesians for preaching and teaching it

Yet Ephesians is not a guide for translation ere are works designed for that task (Larkin Simpson 2015 Merkle) is book is a grammatical-like commentary with interlinear-like English translations of the Greek text that provides exposi-tional commentary-like comments to guide a pastor and teacher in their sermon and teaching preparations

But before delving into examining the ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo in Ephesians it may be helpful to pause dene and illustrate the diamperent types of Greek clauses typical-ly found in the letter

Pauline Independent Clauses

Independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought in a given sentence ere are three types of independent Greek clauses found in the Greek New Testament conjunctive prepositional and asyndetic All three types of independent clauses appear in Ephesians

e rst and most common type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek conjunctive clause is clause is introduced by a Greek conjunction (καί δέ γάρ ἀλλά ἄρα διό οὖν πλήν) Sometimes the Greek conjunction starts the independent clause Other times it appears in a postposi-tive position e independent conjunctive clause dominates Ephesians In fact independent conjunctive clauses appear in Ephesians at least sixty-eight timese following are a few representative samples worthy of mention

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are saved by grace through faith

214a Αὐτὸς γάργάρ ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡmicroῶν214a For he is our peace

219a ἄρα οὖνἄρα οὖν οὐκέτι ἐστὲ ξένοι καὶ πάροικοι219a So then you are no longer strangers and aliens

313a διὸ αἰτοῦmicroαι microὴ ἐγκακεῖν ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσίν microου ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν313a 9erefore I ask that you not be discouraged because of my suampering on your

behalf

41a Παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑmicroᾶς ἐγὼ ὁ δέσmicroιος ἐν κυρίῳ41a 9erefore I a prisoner in the Lord urge you

26 Introduction

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

430a καὶ microὴ λυπεῖτε τὸ πνεῦmicroα τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ430a And do not grieve the Holy Spirit of God

51 γίνεσθε οὖν microιmicroηταὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά51 9erefore be imitators of God as beloved children

533a πλὴνπλὴν καὶ ὑmicroεῖς οἱ καθrsquo ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω533a Nevertheless each of you love your own wife each of you love your own wife

64a Καὶ οἱ πατέρες microὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑmicroῶν64a And fathers do not anger your children

Naturally these Greek conjunctive clauses are independent because they con-tain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneWhile it is not evident above in the pages to follow all independent clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they are independent Each of the independent clauses above begins with a Greek conjunction that makes some sort of connection with a previous clause or transitions to a new thoughtAlso as you can see from the samples above conjunctions sometimes appear in the postpositive position (Eph 28a 14a 41a 20 51) but not always (Eph219a 313a 430a 533a 64a)

e most frequent independent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are those introduced with καί Of the sixty-seven conjunctive independent clauses in Ephesians 35 percent begin with ldquoandrdquo (καί) Even though Paulrsquos favored conjunction is καί ve other Greek conjunctions appear in Ephesians ἀλλά ἄρα οὖν γάρ δέ διό and οὖν e following chart not only lists the Greek conjunction and where they appear in Ephesians it identies how the conjunc-tion has been interpreted semantically in our interpretive English translation for Ephesians

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Ascensive

e conjunction pro-vides a point of focus

ldquoevenrdquo

531c

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 10: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 25

process in this book will increase condence in understanding and appreciating Ephesians for preaching and teaching it

Yet Ephesians is not a guide for translation ere are works designed for that task (Larkin Simpson 2015 Merkle) is book is a grammatical-like commentary with interlinear-like English translations of the Greek text that provides exposi-tional commentary-like comments to guide a pastor and teacher in their sermon and teaching preparations

But before delving into examining the ldquoBig Greek Ideardquo in Ephesians it may be helpful to pause dene and illustrate the diamperent types of Greek clauses typical-ly found in the letter

Pauline Independent Clauses

Independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought in a given sentence ere are three types of independent Greek clauses found in the Greek New Testament conjunctive prepositional and asyndetic All three types of independent clauses appear in Ephesians

e rst and most common type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek conjunctive clause is clause is introduced by a Greek conjunction (καί δέ γάρ ἀλλά ἄρα διό οὖν πλήν) Sometimes the Greek conjunction starts the independent clause Other times it appears in a postposi-tive position e independent conjunctive clause dominates Ephesians In fact independent conjunctive clauses appear in Ephesians at least sixty-eight timese following are a few representative samples worthy of mention

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are saved by grace through faith

214a Αὐτὸς γάργάρ ἐστιν ἡ εἰρήνη ἡmicroῶν214a For he is our peace

219a ἄρα οὖνἄρα οὖν οὐκέτι ἐστὲ ξένοι καὶ πάροικοι219a So then you are no longer strangers and aliens

313a διὸ αἰτοῦmicroαι microὴ ἐγκακεῖν ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσίν microου ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν313a 9erefore I ask that you not be discouraged because of my suampering on your

behalf

41a Παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑmicroᾶς ἐγὼ ὁ δέσmicroιος ἐν κυρίῳ41a 9erefore I a prisoner in the Lord urge you

26 Introduction

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

430a καὶ microὴ λυπεῖτε τὸ πνεῦmicroα τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ430a And do not grieve the Holy Spirit of God

51 γίνεσθε οὖν microιmicroηταὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά51 9erefore be imitators of God as beloved children

533a πλὴνπλὴν καὶ ὑmicroεῖς οἱ καθrsquo ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω533a Nevertheless each of you love your own wife each of you love your own wife

64a Καὶ οἱ πατέρες microὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑmicroῶν64a And fathers do not anger your children

Naturally these Greek conjunctive clauses are independent because they con-tain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneWhile it is not evident above in the pages to follow all independent clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they are independent Each of the independent clauses above begins with a Greek conjunction that makes some sort of connection with a previous clause or transitions to a new thoughtAlso as you can see from the samples above conjunctions sometimes appear in the postpositive position (Eph 28a 14a 41a 20 51) but not always (Eph219a 313a 430a 533a 64a)

e most frequent independent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are those introduced with καί Of the sixty-seven conjunctive independent clauses in Ephesians 35 percent begin with ldquoandrdquo (καί) Even though Paulrsquos favored conjunction is καί ve other Greek conjunctions appear in Ephesians ἀλλά ἄρα οὖν γάρ δέ διό and οὖν e following chart not only lists the Greek conjunction and where they appear in Ephesians it identies how the conjunc-tion has been interpreted semantically in our interpretive English translation for Ephesians

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Ascensive

e conjunction pro-vides a point of focus

ldquoevenrdquo

531c

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 11: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

26 Introduction

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

430a καὶ microὴ λυπεῖτε τὸ πνεῦmicroα τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ430a And do not grieve the Holy Spirit of God

51 γίνεσθε οὖν microιmicroηταὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά51 9erefore be imitators of God as beloved children

533a πλὴνπλὴν καὶ ὑmicroεῖς οἱ καθrsquo ἕνα ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα οὕτως ἀγαπάτω533a Nevertheless each of you love your own wife each of you love your own wife

64a Καὶ οἱ πατέρες microὴ παροργίζετε τὰ τέκνα ὑmicroῶν64a And fathers do not anger your children

Naturally these Greek conjunctive clauses are independent because they con-tain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneWhile it is not evident above in the pages to follow all independent clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they are independent Each of the independent clauses above begins with a Greek conjunction that makes some sort of connection with a previous clause or transitions to a new thoughtAlso as you can see from the samples above conjunctions sometimes appear in the postpositive position (Eph 28a 14a 41a 20 51) but not always (Eph219a 313a 430a 533a 64a)

e most frequent independent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are those introduced with καί Of the sixty-seven conjunctive independent clauses in Ephesians 35 percent begin with ldquoandrdquo (καί) Even though Paulrsquos favored conjunction is καί ve other Greek conjunctions appear in Ephesians ἀλλά ἄρα οὖν γάρ δέ διό and οὖν e following chart not only lists the Greek conjunction and where they appear in Ephesians it identies how the conjunc-tion has been interpreted semantically in our interpretive English translation for Ephesians

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Ascensive

e conjunction pro-vides a point of focus

ldquoevenrdquo

531c

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 12: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 27

Conjunctions in Ephesians

καί ἀλλά δέ γάρ διό ἄρα οὖν οὖν

Connective or Coordinate

e conjunction adds an additional element to the discussion

ldquoand alsordquo

122a 22b

26a 6b 17b

411 17b 26b 30a

54a 11a 14d 14e 18a 29c 31b 33a

617a

533c

Contrastive or Adversative

e conjunction provides an opposing thought to the idea to which is connected

ldquobut yetrdquo

219b

54c 17b 18c 29b

64b

25b 13

47 20 28b 32

53a 8b 11b 13 32b

Emphatic

e conjunction inten-sies the discussion

ldquoindeedrdquo

Explanatory

Following verbs of emotion the conjunc-tion provides additional information

ldquoforrdquo

28b

52a

49a 28a 10a 14a

59 12 14a 29a

Inferential

e conjunction signals a conclusion or sum-mary of a discussion

ldquotherefore thusrdquo

55a 6b 8a

211a

313a

48a 25b

514b

219a 41a 17a

51 7 15a

614a

Transitional

e conjunction moves the discussion in a new direction

ldquonowrdquo

64a 9a 321

621b

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 13: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

28 Introduction

e second type of independent Greek clause in Ephesians is the independent Greek prepositional clause is clause is introduced by a Greek preposition (διὰ τοῦτο τούτου χάριν ἀντὶ τοῦτο) ere are at least six independent clauses in Ephesians introduced with a Greek prepositional phrase

115 ∆ιὰ τοῦτο hellip 16aοὐ παύοmicroαι115 For this reason hellip 16aI do not cease

31 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν ἐγὼ Παῦλος ὁ δέσmicroιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὑπὲρ ὑmicroῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν

31 For this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentiles

314 Τούτου χάρινΤούτου χάριν κάmicroπτω τὰ γόνατά microου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα314 For this reason I bow my knees before the Father

517a διὰ τοῦτο microὴ γίνεσθεγίνεσθε ἄφρονες517a For this reason do not become foolish

531a ἀντὶ τούτου καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν microητέρα531a For this reason a man shall leave his father and mother

613a διὰ τοῦτο ἀναλάβετε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ613a For this reason take up the whole armor of God

Like the independent Greek conjunctive clauses these Greek prepositional claus-es are independent because they contain a subject and predicate present a com-plete thought and can stand alone In the pages that follow all independent prep-ositional clauses will be placed farthest to the le of the page because they too are independent

Ephesians 531a is part of an Old Testament quotation and 314 resumes Paulrsquos argument from 31 is suggests that Paul predominantly uses the phrase διὰ τοῦτο in the letter of Ephesians e signicant interpretive issue that the reader faces is the referent to the prepositional phrase Generally in Ephesians Paul uses the preposition inferentially stating an implication

e third type of independent Greek clause is the independent Greek asyndeton clause is clause has neither an introductory Greek conjunction nor an opening Greek prepositional phrase Yet it too is an independent clause with only a verb as its structural marker It appears at least thirty-ve times in Ephesians Of these a few are worthy of mention because they exemplify what to expect when studying Ephesians ere is but one structural marker the verb which is underlined and in bold print print

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 14: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 29

13a Εὐλογητὸς [ἔστιν] ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ13a Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ

25c mdashχάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιmdash25c mdashyou are savedyou are saved by gracemdash

45a [ἔστιν] εἷς κύριος45a there [is]one Lord

45b [ἔστιν] microία πίστις45b there [is] one faith

45c [ἔστιν] ἓν βάπτισmicroα45c there [is] one baptism

410a (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) ἐστιν καὶ (ὁ ἀναβὰς) ὑπεράνω πάντων τῶν οὐρανῶν410a (e very one who descended) is also (the one who ascended) above all of the heavens

514c ἜγειρεἜγειρε (ὁ καθεύδων)514c Get upGet up (sleeper)

522a Αἱ γυναῖκες [ὑποτάσσεσθε] τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν522a Wives [submit] to your own husbands

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

Once again these Greek asyndeton clauses are independent clauses because they contain a subject and predicate present a complete thought and can stand aloneIn the pages that follow they too will be placed farthest to the le of the page

because they are independent Yet they dier from one another making a signicant rhe-torical thrust

First it is important to recognize that not all asyndeton clauses contain a verb ere are ve occurrences of these elliptical clauses from our examples above (Eph 13a 45a 5b 5c 522a) In English we have to supply

Ellipsis DenedAn ellipsis is the omission of a word or any element of the Greek language that renders a sentence ldquoungrammaticalrdquo yet the missing element or word is from the context

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 15: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

30 Introduction

a verb which raises the question about the nature of the clause e clause might make a simple statement in which case we would use an equative verb For ex-ample in Ephesians 45 Paul makes a series of assertions that require us to use the verb is in English ldquothere is one Lord there is one faith there is one baptismrdquo In Ephesians 410a Paul supplies the equative verb On the other hand anoth-er clause may insinuate an imperative In Ephesians 13a we might insert some form of εἰmicroί but the context suggests an imperatival idea ldquoBlessed be Godrdquo or ldquoGod should be blessedrdquo Similarly in Ephesians 522a the verb is of this asyn -deton clause is implied from the participle in verse 21 but the context suggests that the force of the verb is imperatival ldquoWives submit to your own husbandssubmit rdquo

Second the challenge with interpreting asyndeton clauses is understanding their relationship to the context Some of these clauses are straightforward some begin a new thought and do not require any additional link For example in the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the familyin the household code Paul addresses various members of the family Each sec-tion begins with an asyndeton (Eph 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 522 25a above cf 61 5) He begins the body of the letter with an asyndeton (Eph 13a) At times the asyndeton might simply be an aside For example in Ephesians 25c Paul interrupts his state-ment about how God treats the believer to make a statement about the believerHe repeats the phrase in verse 8 but introduces it with a conjunction (γάρ)And at times the connection is not clear For example in Ephesians 44ndash6 he makes a series of asyndetic statements with no connection leaving the reader to make the connection

Finally since there are no other markers we would expect to nd only the verb of an asyndeton clause marked However in our examples above we have three clauses with additional markers (Eph 25c 410a 514c) Two of these involve substantival participles In Ephesians 410a Paul equates ldquothe one who comes downrdquo (ὁ καταβὰς αὐτός) with ldquothe one who goes uprdquo (ὁ ἀναβάς) Similarly in Ephesians 514c Paul uses the substantival participle as a vocative ldquoGet up sleeperrdquo We have marked the substantival participles because of their impor-tance but they do not merit being placed on their own line Ephesians 25c merits our attention as well e verb in the clause is periphrastic Even though there are two verbs they create one verbal idea ldquoyou are saved by gracerdquo Be -cause they represent a single verbal idea we have placed a contiguous line under both verbs

In summary independent Greek clauses are rather important in determining Paulrsquos main thought of a given sentence ere are 109 independent clauses in Ephesians While the independent Greek conjunctive clause dominates Ephe-sians with sixty-eight occurrences the independent Greek asyndeton clause ap-pears thirty-ve times e independent Greek prepositional clause occurs mere-ly six times and only in Ephesians

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 16: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 31

e chart below identies where the 109 independent Greek clauses appear in Ephesians

Independent Clauses in Ephesians

ChapterConjunctive

Independent Clauses

Prepositional

Independent Clauses

Asyndeton

Independent Clauses

1 22a 22b 16a 1a 2 3a

25b 6a 6b 8a 8b 10a 11a 13 14a 17b 19a 19b

5c 8c 9a

3 13a 21 1 14 8a

41a 7 8a 9a 11 17a 17b 20 25b 26b 28b 30a 32

4a 4b 5a 5b 5c 6 8c 8d 10a 26a 26c 27 28a 29a 31

5

1 2a 3a 4a 4c 5a 6b 7 8a 8b 9a 11a 11b 12 13 14a 14b 14d 14e 15a 17b 18a 18c 29a 29b 29c 31b 31c 32b 33a 33c

17a 31a6a 8d 14c 22a 25a 28c 32a

61b 4a 4b 9a 10a 14a 17a 21b

13a 1a 2a 5a 11a 23 24

roughout Ephesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching indepenEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and TeachingEphesians An Exegetical Guide for Preaching and Teaching -dent Greek clauses will appear to the extreme le of the page with their verbs underlined and oen in bold print print Yet just as there are dierent types of inde-pendent clauses there are various types of dependent clauses in Ephesians wor-thy of introduction because they expand Paulrsquos initial thoughts expressed in his independent clauses

Pauline Dependent Clauses

ere are four types of dependent Greek clauses (1) Greek pronominal clauses are introduced by a relative pronoun (ὅς ἥ ὅ) relative adjective (οἷος such as ὅσος as muchmany as) relative adverb (ὅπου where ὅτε when) or sometimes a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος) (2) Greek conjunctive clauses are introduced by a subordinate Greek conjunction (ἵνα ὅτι καθώς εἰ ἐάν etc) (3) Greek participial clauses are introduced by a participle and (4) Greek innitival clauses are introduced by certain innitives or innitives with a preposition (eg διά microετά εἰς + innitive) Regardless of its type dependent clauses generally modi-fy a word or possible concept in another clause

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 17: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

32 Introduction

Procedurally the type of dependent clause is rst identied and then the relation-ship of the dependent Greek clause to words in other clauses (ie the syntactical function) is determined e syntactical function of a Greek clause may be adver-bial adjectival or substantival Once the syntactical relationship of a dependent clause is determined it is positioned in the outline for easy identication If adverbial the rst word of the dependent clause is po-sitioned under the Greek verb it modies if adjectival the rst word of the dependent clause is positioned under the Greek noun or pronoun it modies if substantival the clause is oen placed in parentheses

e rst type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek pronominal clauseere are at least forty-six examples of the dependent Greek pronominal clause in Ephesians Naturally all begin with a Greek pronoun Of these thirty-eight rel-ative pronouns are adjectival In Ephesians Paul uses the interrogative pronoun τίς substantivally eight timessubstantivally In the samples below the adjectival relative clause is positioned under or just above the noun or pronoun it modies All substanti-val relative clauses functioning as either the subject or direct object of a clause are placed in parentheses or on their own line All relative pronouns are underlinedand at times in bold print along with their respective verbs Below are extensive examples from Ephesians 15ndash9 18ndash19 and 24 that illustrate how Paul uses pro-nominal clauses in the letter

15a προορίσαςπροορίσας ἡmicroᾶς 5bεἰς υἱοθεσίαν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς αὐτόν κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ 6aεἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ6a

15a while predestiningwhile predestining us for adoption through Jesus Christ to himself according while predestiningwhile predestiningto his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

16b ἧςἧς ἐχαρίτωσενἐχαρίτωσεν ἡmicroᾶς ἐν (τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ)16b which he gavehe gave to us in (the beloved)

17 ἐν ᾧᾧ ἔχοmicroενἔχοmicroεν τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν διὰ τοῦ αἵmicroατος αὐτοῦ τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶνπαραπτωmicroάτων κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ

17 In whom we have the redemption through his blood the forgiveness of our trespasses according to his rich grace

18 ἧςἧς ἐπερίσσευσενἐπερίσσευσεν εἰςεἰς ἡmicroᾶς ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει18 which he lavished on us in all wisdom and insight

|

Steps for Identifying Dependent Clauses

1 Take note of the type of de-pendent clause it is

2 Be aware of the clausersquos syn-tactical function

3 Identify the verb noun or pronoun the clause modies

ἧς

to his pleasurable will for the praise for his glorious grace

ἧς

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 18: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 33

|19a γνωρίσαςγνωρίσας ἡmicroῖν τὸ microυστήριον τοῦ θελήmicroατος αὐτοῦ

κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ19a by making knownby making known to us the mystery of his will according to

his pleasure

19b ἣνἣν προέθετοπροέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 10aεἰς10a οἰκονοmicroίαν τοῦ πληρώmicroατος τῶνκαιρῶν

19b which he intended in him10afor the administration of the fullness of time

118b εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι εἰς τὸ εἰδέναι ὑmicroᾶς118b so that you may you may know

|118c τίςτίς ἐστιν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ118c what is the hope of his calling

|118d τίςτίς [ἔστιν] ὁ πλοῦτος τῆς δόξης τῆς κληρονοmicroίας

αὐτοῦ ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις118d what [is] the wealth of his glorious inheritance among the

saints|

119 καὶ τί [ἔστιν] (τὸ ὑπερβάλλον microέγεθος τῆς δυνάmicroεωςαὐτοῦ) εἰς (ἡmicroᾶς τοὺς πιστεύοντας) κατὰ τὴνἐνέργειαν τοῦ κράτους τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ

119 and what [is] (his surpassingly great power) for (us who believe) according to the working of his strong might

24aὁ δὲ θεὸς πλούσιος θεὸς πλούσιος ὢν ἐν ἐλέει διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην αὐτοῦ24a but God because he is rich in mercy because of his great love rich in mercy because of his great love

24b ἣνἣν ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν ἡmicroᾶς24b with which he loved us

ese Greek pronominal clauses are representative of what to expect in Ephe-sians e pronominal clause that dominates Ephesians is the Greek relative clause (ὅς ἥ ὅ) ey are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Yet they contribute grammatically to the sentence either as a subject or direct object of a clause (substantival) or as a modier of a noun or pronoun within another clause (adjectival)

Paul predominantly uses the interrogative pronoun (τίς) substantivally) substantivally) substantivally For ex-ample in Ephesians 118bndash19 Paul repeats the interrogative pronoun three times

ἣν

his pleasure

rich in mercy because of his great love

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 19: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

34 Introduction

each functioning as the direct object of the innitive εἰδέναι (ldquoknowrdquo) e sub-stantival clauses express what Paul wants these believers to know the hope of Godrsquos calling the wealth of his inheritance and his power at work within those who believe Due to Paulrsquos extensive sentence we have placed each substantival clause on its own line Each clause has its own grammatical issues e rst sub-stantival clause is straightforward e last two are ellipticalmdashin English we have to supply the verb is ldquowhat isrdquo e last clause contains two substantival partici -ples e rst substantival participle functions as the subject of the clause e second substantival participle functions as the object of the preposition εἰςmdashthis power is for ldquous who believefor rdquo

Paul predominantly uses the relative pronoun adjectivally He is able to string to-gether long sentences with the relative pronoun For example he uses the relative pronoun eight times in Ephesians 13ndash14 a text that makes up a single sentenceIn contrast he uses the relative pronoun only twelve times throughout the second half of the letter (Eph 4ndash6) where he uses shorter sentences Even though Ephesians 15ndash9 is part of the sentence it provides a good in-sight into how Paul uses the relative pronoun e rst relative pronoun appears in verse 6b It modies the object of the preposition at the end of verse 6a ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause is aligned under the word it modies Even though the case of the pronoun is genitive it functions as the direct object but due to attraction (BDF sect2942) the case of the pronoun shied to agree with the case of the anteced-ent e relative pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (feminine) with the noun that it modies As we will see in the examples below this is more common in Paulrsquos writing

e second relative pronoun appears in verse 7 e pronoun functions as the object of the preposition ἐν ldquoin whomrdquo e antecedent of the pronoun is the substantival participle τῷ ἠγαπηmicroένῳ from verse 6b a reference to Christ e pronoun retains the number (singular) and gender (masculine) from the antecedent but unlike our rst pronoun the case is determined by its function within the relative clause

e Relative Pronoun

Regular UsageA relative pronoun usually agrees in number and gender with its antecedent and thereby links the noun or pronoun to the dependent relative clause to de-scribe clarify or restrict its antecedent

Unusual UsageSometimes the relative pronounrsquos gender does not match its antecedent because sense agreement supersedes syntactical agreement (construction ad sensum)

Other times the case of the relative pro-noun is attracted to that of its anteced-ent Oen referred to as ldquoattractionrdquo or ldquodirect attractionrdquo

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 20: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 35

e third relative pronoun appears in verse 8 e antecedent of the pronoun is at the end of verse 7 a repeated reference to ldquogracerdquo (χάριτος) e relative clause gives the reader more information about this grace namely that God lavishes it on the believer e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) but again the case shis We would anticipate the case to be accusative since it functions as the direct object but the case shis to genitive to agree with the antecedent

e nal relative pronoun appears in verse 9b e antecedent of the pronoun is Godrsquos ldquopleasurerdquo (εὐδοκίαν) e relative clause gives a further description of Godrsquos pleasuremdashhe intended it in Christ for his plan for the fullness of timee pronoun agrees with the number (singular) and gender (masculine) of the antecedent but its case is determined by its function in the clause In this case it is accusative since it is the direct object of the verb προέθετο (ldquohe es-tablishedrdquo)

e last relative clause in our examples above illustrates how Paul can empha-size an element with a redundant relative clause For example in Ephesians 24 he uses a relative clause to modify ldquoloverdquo (ἀγάπην) e pronoun agrees with the antecedent in number (singular) and gender (feminine) e pronoun is instrumental so we would expect it to be dative but due to attraction the case shied to accusative the case of the antecedent In this example Paul uses the cognate verb in the relative clause He describes a love ldquowith which he loved usrdquo By using a verb within the same semantic family Paul emphasizes Godrsquos love for us

e second type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek conjunctive clause ere are at least seventy-six examples of dependent Greek conjunctive clauses in Ephesians e following are a few representative samples worthy of mention e Greek conjunctions with their respective verbs are underlined and in bold print for easy recognition

211a ∆ιὸ microνηmicroονεύετεmicroνηmicroονεύετε211a erefore remember

|211b ὅτι ποτὲ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί (οἱ λεγόmicroενοι ἀκροβυστία)

ὑπὸ (τῆς λεγοmicroένης περιτοmicroῆς) ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου211b that once youmdashGentiles in esh (the ones called ldquouncircumcisedrdquo)

by (the so-called ldquocircumcisedrdquo) done by hand in the eshmdash|

212a ὅτι ἦτεἦτε τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ χωρὶς Χριστοῦ212a that you wereyou were at that time without the Messiah

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 21: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

36 Introduction

[εὐαγγελίσασθαι hellip καὶ φωτίσαι (38ndash9)][to proclaim the gospel and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv and enlighten (vv 8ndash9)]

310 ἵνα γνωρισθῇγνωρισθῇ νῦν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις διὰ τῆς ἐκκλησίας ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 11a κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων

310 so that the multifaceted wisdom of God mightmight now be made known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places through the church 11aaccording to his eternal purpose

420 ὑmicroεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐmicroάθετεἐmicroάθετε τὸν Χριστόν420 But you have not learned Christ in such a manner

421a εἴ γεεἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατεἠκούσατε421a if indeedif you heardyou heard about him

|421b καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητεἐδιδάχθητε421b and were taughtwere taught in him

516a ἐξαγοραζόmicroενοιἐξαγοραζόmicroενοι τὸν καιρόν516a by making the most ofby making the most of the opportunityby making the most ofby making the most of

|516b ὅτι αἱ ἡmicroέραι πονηραί εἰσιν516b because the days are evil

525a Οἱ ἄνδρες ἀγαπᾶτεἀγαπᾶτε τὰς γυναῖκας525a Husbands love your wives

|525b καθὼςκαθὼς καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἠγάπησενἠγάπησεν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν525b just asjust as Christ also loved the church

|525c καὶ ἑαυτὸν παρέδωκενπαρέδωκεν ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς525c and gavegave himself for her

[προσευχόmicroενοι (v (v (v 18a)][by praying (v[by praying (v[by praying (v 18a)]

|619b ἵνα microοι δοθῇδοθῇ λόγος ἐν ἀνοίξει τοῦ στόmicroατός microου619b that a word may be givenmay be given to me when I speak

ἵνα

[to proclaim the gospel

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 22: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 37

621a Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτεεἰδῆτε καὶ ὑmicroεῖς τὰ κατrsquo ἐmicroέ (τί πράσσω)621a Now that you also might knowmight know about my circumstances (what I am might know

doing)|

621b πάντα γνωρίσειγνωρίσει ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς ὑmicroῖν Τυχικὸς ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἀδελφὸς καὶ πιστὸς διάκονος ἐν κυρίῳ

621b Tychicus the beloved brother and faithful servant in the Lord will make known all things to you

Like the dependent Greek pronominal clauses these Greek conjunctive clauses are unable to stand alone and thereby are dependent clauses Of these examples ve are clearly adverbial and two are substantival e rst word of the adver-bial and adjectival conjunctive clauses is positioned either under or above the word it modies e substantival clauses are placed in parentheses or placed on their own line

Even though most of the conjunctive clauses in Ephesians are adverbial Paul uses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivallyuses at least fourteen conjunctive clauses substantivally ere are two examples from the above (Eph 211ndash12 619b) In Ephesians 211ndash12 the conjunction ὅτι in verse 11b and 12a function as the direct object of the verb microνηmicroονεύετε (ldquorememberrdquo) in verse 11a e conjunctions introduce what Paul wants these Gentile believers to remember that they were alienated from the people of GodBecause of this the conjunction introduces indirect discourse

e second substantival clause is in Ephesians 619b e conjunction ἵνα introduces a clause that functions as the direct object of the participle προσευχόmicroενοι (ldquoprayingrdquo) in verse 18 e conjunction introduces the spe-cic requests in Paulrsquos prayer In verse 19 his request is that God might give him a word when he speaks He makes a second request in verse 20b to boldly proclaim the gospel He regularly uses ἵνα to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf to introduce prayer requests (cf117 316a 18a 19b)

In Ephesians Paul uses sixty-one adverbial conjunctive clauses in a number of dierent ways e rst example comes from Ephesians 310 Paul introduces the clause with the conjunction ἵνα e conjunction modies both innitives from verses 8b and 9a Since there is an intervening clause in verse 9b we have repeated the innitives to make the relationship clear e conjunction expresses the purpose of the innitives Paulrsquos ministry is to preach the gospel and enlighten people so that Godrsquos wisdom might be made known to the rulers so thatand authorities in the heavenly places e last example Ephesians 621a is a similar use of ἵνα Paul is sending Tychicus to the Ephesians to give them a report so that they will know about Paulrsquos circumstancesso that In this instance the conjunctive clause precedes the independent clause In normal circumstances

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 23: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

38 Introduction

it follows the independent clause Finally in Ephesians 516 he introduces a conjunctive clause with ὅτι e clause modies the participle in verse 16e conjunctive clause gives the reason why believers should redeem the time ldquobecause the days are evilrdquo

In Ephesians 421 the third example above the conjunction introduces a condi-tional clause In this instance the clause is dependent on the independent clause in verse 20mdashthe apodosis of the conditional statement e conjunctive clauses in verse 21 are the protasis ldquoif indeed you heard about him (vif indeed you heard about him (v indeed you heard about him (v 21a) and were taught in him (vtaught in him (vtaught in him (v 21b) then you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v you did not learn Christ in such a manner (v 20)rdquo is is a rst class conditional statement which puts forward a statement of truth for the sake of an argument (W 690ndash94) By framing the conditional statement this way Paul assumes that the Ephesians have indeed learned Christ

e nal example comes from Ephesians 525 e conjunctive clauses in verses 25b and 25c modify the verb of the independent clause in verse 25a Paulrsquos com-mand for husbands to love their wives e conjunctions express a comparison describing how husbands should love their wives namely in the same way Christ loved the churchmdashby giving himself up for her

e third type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek participial clauseere are at least one hundred dependent Greek participial clauses in Ephesianse most prominent dependent Greek participial clause is the adverbial partici-ple which modies another verb Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially Paul uses y-six participles adverbially ere are twenty-three adjectival participles modifying other nouns and twenty-one substantival participles which function as a noun e following examples are worthy of mention with all participles underlined and in bold print and at times print and at times placed in parentheses for easy grammatical identication

217a καὶ ἐλθὼν217a and when he came

217b εὐηγγελίσατοεὐηγγελίσατο εἰρήνην ὑmicroῖν τοῖς microακρὰν καὶ εἰρήνην τοῖς ἐγγύς217b he proclaimed the good newshe proclaimed the good news of peace to you who were far o and peace to

those who were near

39b τίς [ἐστιν] ἡ οἰκονοmicroία (τοῦ microυστηρίου τοῦ ἀποκεκρυmicromicroένουἀποκεκρυmicromicroένου) ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν (τῷ θεῷ τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι)

39b what [is] the administration of (the mystery that was hidden) for ages in (God who created all things)

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 24: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 39

428a (ὁ κλέπτων) microηκέτι κλεπτέτω428a (e one who steals) must no longer steal

428b microᾶλλον δὲ κοπιάτω428b but rather must do work

|428c ἐργαζόmicroενοςἐργαζόmicroενος ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν τὸ ἀγαθόν428c by producingby producing what is good with his own handsby producing

|428d ἵνα ἔχῃἔχῃ microεταδιδόναι (τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντιἔχοντι)428d that they may havethey may have something to share with (the one who

has need)

518c ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθεπληροῦσθε ἐν πνεύmicroατι518c but be lled by the Spirit

|519a λαλοῦντεςλαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψαλmicroοῖς καὶ ὕmicroνοις καὶ ᾠδαῖς

πνευmicroατικαῖς519a with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking to one another with psalms hymns with the result of speakingwith the result of speaking

and spiritual songs|

519b ᾄδοντεςᾄδοντες519b with the result of singingwith the result of singing

|519c καὶ ψάλλοντεςψάλλοντες τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑmicroῶν τῷ κυρίῳ519c and with the result of making musicwith the result of making music with your heart to the Lord with your heart to the Lord

|520 εὐχαριστοῦντεςεὐχαριστοῦντες πάντοτε ὑπὲρ πάντων ἐν ὀνόmicroατι τοῦ κυρίου

ἡmicroῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῷ θεῷ καὶ πατρί520 with the result of giving thankswith the result of giving thanks always for all things in the name of

our Lord Jesus Christ to the God and Father|

521 ὑποτασσόmicroενοιὑποτασσόmicroενοι ἀλλήλοις ἐν φόβῳ Χριστοῦ521 with the result of submittingwith the result of submitting to one another in the fear of Christwith the result of submitting

614a στῆτεστῆτε οὖν614a erefore stand

614b περιζωσάmicroενοιπεριζωσάmicroενοι τὴν ὀσφὺν ὑmicroῶν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ614b by girdingby girding your waist with truthby girding

|

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 25: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

40 Introduction

|614c καὶ ἐνδυσάmicroενοιἐνδυσάmicroενοι τὸν θώρακα τῆς δικαιοσύνης614c and by putting onby putting on the breastplate of righteousness the breastplate of righteousness

|615 καὶ ὑποδησάmicroενοιὑποδησάmicroενοι τοὺς πόδας ἐν ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου

τῆς εἰρήνης615 by bindingby binding your feet with the preparation of the gospel of peace

616a ἐν πᾶσιν ἀναλαβόντεςἀναλαβόντες τὸν θυρεὸν τῆς πίστεως616a in all things by taking upby taking up the shield of faith

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent participial clauses in Ephesians As was the case for the Greek pronominal and Greek conjunctive dependent clauses these Greek participial clauses cannot stand alone ey are dependent

Most of the participles in Ephesians are adverbial ere are several examples of this above First in Ephesians 217 the participle ἐλθών modies the follow-ing verb εὐηγγελίσατο e participle expresses a temporal element describing when Christ preached peace ldquowhen he camerdquo Another example is in Ephesians 518bndash20 Paul uses ve participles to modify the main verb in the independent conjunctive clause ldquoand be lled by the Spiritrdquo ese participles most likely de -scribe the result of being lled by the Spirit speaking to one another in psalms resultsinging praising the Lord giving thanks and submitting to one another Finally in Ephesians 614ndash16a Paul gives a similar string of participles that adverbially modify the verb ldquostandrdquo ese participles describe the means by which a believ-er stands against the evil one ldquoby girding their waist with truth putting on the bybreastplate of righteousness binding their feet with the gospel and taking up the shield of faithrdquo Adverbial participles are set on their own line in the clausal layout and usually in bold and underlined

Substantival participles function as a noun in the sentence ey are placed in pa-rentheses in order to visualize the contribution the dependent Greek participle makes to the clause In Ephesians 428 Paul uses two substantival participles First he tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longerhe tells those who steal to steal no longer e substantival participle ὁ κλέπτων(ldquothe one who stealsrdquo) functions as the subject of the imperatives ldquono longer stealrdquo and ldquomust do workrdquo e second substantival participle τῷ χρείαν ἔχοντι (ldquothe one who has needrdquo) functions as the indirect object of the innitive microεταδιδόναι(ldquoto sharerdquo) He commands these thieves to work with their hands so that they might have something to share with those who have need e accusative χρείαν(ldquoneedrdquo) is the direct object of the substantival participle ldquothe one who has needrdquo In the clausal outline substantival participles are marked with parentheses marked

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 26: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 41

with parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural markerwith parentheses but retained on the same line with the major structural marker In contrast the participle in verse 28c is adverbial It modies the imperative κοπιάτω describing how these former thieves should workmdashby laboring with their hands

Adjectival participles modify other nouns ese participles are placed in parenthe-ses normally with the noun that they modify in order to visualize their contribu-tion to the clause A good example comes from Ephesians 39b the second example above e participles are a part of a clause describing what Paul was making known as a part of his ministry ldquowhat is the administration of the mystery that was hidden for ages in God who created all thingsrdquo e rst participle modies ldquomysteryrdquo ( τοῦ microυστηρίου) the second participle modies ldquoGodrdquo (τῷ θεῷ) Both participles agree with the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and genderwith the nounrsquos case number and gender e noun is included with the participle within the parentheses and the participle itself is underlined Articular participles will always be substantival or adjectival anarthrous participles will generally adver-bial but can be adjectival (see eg Eph 121b 414a 527) (W 617)

e fourth type of dependent Greek clause is the dependent Greek innitival clauseere are twenty-nine dependent Greek innitival clauses in Ephesians Most of these innitives are adverbial making up seventeen instances ere are eight in-stances of innitives functioning substantivally (Eph 110b 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512) and four instances of innitives functioning adjectivally (Eph 36b 8b 9a 17a) e Greek substantival innitives below are underlined and are in boldtype with their respective clauses placed in parentheses for easy identication

38a ἐmicroοὶ τῷ ἐλαχιστοτέρῳ πάντων ἁγίων ἐδόθηἐδόθη ἡ χάρις αὕτη38a is grace was givenwas given to me the very least of all of the saints

38b τοῖς ἔθνεσιν εὐαγγελίσασθαιεὐαγγελίσασθαι τὸ ἀνεξιχνίαστον πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

38b to proclaim the good newsto proclaim the good news of the unfathomable wealth of Christ to the Gentiles

[ἐδιδάχθητε (v (v (v 21b)][you were taught (v[you were taught (v[you were taught (v 21b)]

|422 ἀποθέσθαι ὑmicroᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν (τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν φθειρόmicroενον) κατὰ τὰς ἐπιθυmicroίας τῆς ἀπάτης422 that you put o-that you put o- (the old man who is corrupted) according to the former that you put o-that you put o-behavior according to the desires from deceit

|423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι δὲ τῷ πνεύmicroατι τοῦ νοὸς ὑmicroῶν423 but you are being renewedyou are being renewed in your spirit your mind in your spirit your mind

|

τοῖς ἔθνεσιν

to me the very least of all of the saints

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 27: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

42 Introduction

|424 καὶ ἐνδύσασθαι (τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν κατὰ θεὸν κτισθέντα)

ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ὁσιότητι τῆς ἀληθείας424 and you put onyou put on (the new self created according to Godrsquos likeness) in

righteousness and holiness from truth

611a ἐνδύσασθε τὴν πανοπλίαν τοῦ θεοῦ611a Put on the whole armor of God

|611b πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαιπρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι ὑmicroᾶς 611c στῆναιστῆναι πρὸς τὰς microεθοδείας τοῦ

διαβόλου611b so that you you can 611c stand against the schemes of the devil

ese examples are representative of what to expect when translating depen-dent innitival clauses in Ephesians Like the other dependent clauses Greek innitival clauses cannot stand on their own ey have dependent relation-ships with other clauses

Most of the innitives in Ephesians are adverbial modifying another verb is is the case in the nal example above In Ephesians 611b the innitive δύνασθαι(ldquocanrdquo) modies the verb in the independent clause ἐνδύσασθε (ldquoput onrdquo) e innitive expresses the purpose for putting on the whole armor of God e sec-ond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (vond innitive in the verse (v 11c) is also adverbial modifying the rst innitiveis innitive is complementary completing the verbal idea of the innitive e purpose for putting on the whole armor of God is so that the believer can standagainst the schemes of the devil In Ephesians out of the seventeen adverbial in-nitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementarynitives eleven are complementary

e adjectival innitive modies a noun in another clause We see a good example of this in Ephesians 38 In verse 8a Paul describes his ministry as grace which God gave to him In verse 8b he uses the innitive to describe this grace name-ly to proclaim the good news of Christrsquos unfathomable wealth to the GentilesSince the innitive clause modies a noun it is adjectival e innitival clause is epexegetical giving more denition to Godrsquos grace (W 607) Even though we have placed the innitival clause on a line by itself we have visually shown that it modies the noun χάρις (ldquogracerdquo)

Finally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivallyFinally the innitive can function substantivally e innitival clause can func-tion as a noun In Ephesians 422ndash24 Paul gives three innitives that function as the direct object of the verb ldquoyou were taughtrdquo (ἐδιδάχθητε) from verse 21 e innitives express indirect discourse giving what the Ephesian believers were

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 28: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

e Clausal Outline 43

taught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (vtaught namely that they took o the old self (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 22) renewed their minds (v 23) and put on the new self (vand put on the new self (vand put on the new self (v 24)

In summary there are four types of dependent Greek clauses pronominal con-junctive participial and innitival ese dependent clauses are extremely im-portant because they provide additional information about the independent clause that helps trace Paulrsquos ow of thought e most frequent type of dependent Greek clause in Ephesians is the dependent Greek participle clauses with at least one hundred examples Paul regularly uses dependent Greek conjunctive clauseswith at least seventy-six examples in Ephesians Even though it is signicantly fewer Paul still regularly uses dependent Greek pronominal clauses with at least forty-six examples in Ephesians Finally he uses at least twenty-nine at least dependent Greek innitival clauses in the letter

e following chart lists the types of dependent clauses in Ephesians their syn-tactical function and their semantical category is identied as we have interpret-ed them

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Substantival

Clauses

Pronominal

Interrogative Relative Pronoun Clause 118c 18d 19 39b 18c 510 17b 621a

Conjunctive ὅτι Direct Object 211b 12a 33a 49b 68b 9d 9e

ὅτι Appositional 55b

ἵνα Direct Object 117 316a 18a 19b 619b 20b

Participial Subject 410a 28a 528c

Predicate nominative 410a

Objective (direct object indirect object object of the preposi-tion) 11b 6b 11b 21b 23 320a 428d 512 6 24

Appositional 13b 12 19 211b 13 14b (2x)

Vocative 514c

Innitive Direct Objects 313b 16b 417c 22 23 24 512

Appositional 110b

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 29: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

44 Introduction

Syntactical Function

Four Types of Dependent Clauses and Verbal Usage in Ephesians

Adjectival

Clauses

Pronominal Relative Pronoun Clause 16b 7 8 9b 11a 13a 13b 14 20a 22 3a 3c 4b 10c 21b 22 34 5a 7 11b 12 15 20b 20c 41c 15c 16 30b 54b 18b 616b 17b 20a 22a

Indenite Relative Pronoun Clause 123 313c 419b 62b

Conjunctive None

Participial Attributive 119 21b 22 7 (2x) 11b 32 7 9b (2x) 19a 20c 414a (2x) 16 (2x) 18b 22 24 513 14a 27 616b

Innitive Epexegetical 36 8b 9a 17a

Adverbial

Clauses

Pronominal None

Conjunctive ὅτι + Indicative Mood Clauses 218 425c 516b 23a 30 612

ἵνα + Subjunctive Mood Clauses 27 9b 10d 15b 16a 310 410b 14a 15b 28d 29c 526a 27 63a 3b 13b 21a 22b 22c

οὕτως πῶς καθώς ώς 14a 23d 33b 5b 44c 17d 21c 32c 52b 2c 3b 8c 15b 15c 15d 22b 23b 24a 24b 25b 25c 28a 28b 29d 33b 65b 6b 6c 7b 20c

εἴ (rst class condition) 32 421a 21b 29b

ἐάν (third class condition) 68c

εἰ microή 49b

microέχρι (temporal) 413

Participial Temporal 15a 13a 13b 15 16b 217a 34 48b 613d

Causal 111b 18a 24a 10b 20a 317b 17c 419a 25a 68a 9c

Means 19a 20b 20c 215a 16b 21a 42b 3a 15a 28c 32b 510 16a 26b 614b 14c 15 16a 18a 18b

Manner 23b 12b 12d 418a 18b 66d 7a 9b

Concessive 21 5a

Result 215c 519a 19b 19c 20 21

Genitive Absolute 220b

Innitive Purpose 14b 12 18b 428d 611b

Result 619c

Complementary 34 18b 19a 20a 41b 3b 528a 611c 13c 13e 20d

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 30: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 45

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians

Every author of the Greek New Testament has a writing style that exhibits features readily repeated or perhaps even unique to their letters Speaking very simplisti-cally the author of Hebrews likes chiastic structures Peter somewhat idiomatically employs Greek imperatival participles Jude favors the use of adjectival Greek parti-ciples and the adverbial Greek participle abounds in Paul e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude oen appeal to the Old Testament either by direct quotation or al-lusion e authors of Hebrews Peter and Jude are at times diKcult to read due to their complex writing styles Although there are other stylistic issues that could be listed for each of these authors the point to be made here is that Paul also exhibits several stylistic features in Ephesians worth highlighting

For example several commentators have noted Paulrsquos verbosity within the letter (Turner2 83) In fact some of the longest sentences in the Greek New Testament are found in Ephesians A number of things in Paulrsquos writing style leads to this wordiness He tends to create genitive strings and amass prepositional phras-es creating lengthy clauses On occasion he seems to move away from his main point creating a digression e focus of this section is to look at some of the features that are peculiar to Ephesians

Paulrsquos Style in Ephesians

e rst stylistic element that stands out when reading Ephesians is the length of the sentences e rst sentence in the body of the letter (Eph 13ndash14) is the longest in the Greek New Testament spanning 202 words In fact there are eight lengthy sentences throughout the letter

13ndash14 202 words115ndash23 169 words21ndash7 124 words32ndash13 189 words314ndash19 126 words41ndash6 71 words411ndash16 125 words614ndash20 113 words4

ese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letterese eight sentences alone make up 46 percent of the letter Most of these sen-tences come from the rst half of the book ese long sentences account for the dearth of independent clauses particularly in the rst half of the book ere are only twenty-six independent clauses in Ephesians 1ndash3 compared to eighty-three

4 ese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectivelyese totals come from Hoehner 153 247 306 417 472 501 538 837 respectively

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 31: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

46 Introduction

in Ephesians 4ndash6 giving a total of 109 independent clauses ese results are stark when we compare this to another book such as 1 John which is a little shorter than Ephesians First John uses at least 179 independent clauses (Bateman 2017 32ndash36)

Besides using extensive dependent clauses to extend these sentences two other features of these sentences stand out genitive chains and prepositional phrasesGenitive chains are several genitives usually modifying the one before it Below is a sample of a genitive chain and the exegetical issues that they raise e genitive chains are underlined

16a εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦδόξης τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ16a for the praise for his glorious gracefor his glorious grace

e diculty with genitive chains is understanding the relationship between the genitives In Ephesians 16 the genitive δόξης could be an attributive genitive ldquogloriousldquo praiserdquo Another option is that it could function as an objective geni -tivemdashthe reason for our praise In this case the genitive χάριτος would be attrib-utive ldquofor the praise of his gracious gloryrdquo Finally the δόξης could be attributive and χάριτος could be objective ldquofor the praise of his glorious gracerdquo While teas -ing out the semantics of the genitive might seem tedious there is exegetical value to determine the object of praise in Ephesians 1

Prepositional phrases also raise similar types of questions Understanding what each prepositional phrase modies is essential to understand Paulrsquos argumentroughout the letter Paul modies a clause with several prepositional phrasesFor example in Ephesians 13ndash14 Paul uses thirty-ve prepositions Two exam-ples highlight the issues

One example comes from Ephesians 14 e prepositional phrase at the end of verse 4 ldquoin loverdquo (ἐν ἀγάπῃ) could modify either the participle in verse 5 ldquopre-destiningrdquo (προορίσας) describing how God predestined us If this is the case then this most likely refers to Godrsquos love for the believer Most English transla-tions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cftions render the phrase this way (cf esv niv hcsb rsv nrsv) On the other hand the prepositional phrase could modify the previous clause ldquohe chose us to be holy and blameless in loverdquo this suggests that Paul is referring to the believerrsquos love (see Syntactical Nugget at 14b)

Our second example comes from Ephesians 412 which contains three preposi-tional phrases that modify the verb in verse 11 ἔδωκεν (ldquoappointedrdquo) God ap-pointed these Christian leaders ldquoto equip the saints for the work of servicefor rdquo If the prepositions are parallel to one another then the grammar suggests that Paul intends for these Christian leaders to both equip the saints and do the work of service On the other hand if the second prepositional phrase modies the rst

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 32: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 47

then Paul intends these leaders to equip the saints so that the saints can do the work of the ministrymdashno small digterence in meaning e phrases could be out-lined in the following ways (see Syntactical Nugget at 411)

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίωνεἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquoldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

vvv 11 καὶ αὐτὸς ἔδωκεν hellipπρὸςπρὸς τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων τὸν καταρτισmicroὸν τῶν ἁγίων

εἰςεἰς ἔργον διακονίαςεἰςεἰς οἰκοδοmicroὴν τοῦ σώmicroατος τοῦ Χριστοῦ

vvv 11 ldquoand he gavegave helliprdquoldquofor the equipping of the saintsrdquo the equipping of the saintsrdquo

ldquofor the work of ministryrdquoldquoin the building up of the body of Christrdquo

Both genitive chains and prepositional phrases are important to Paulrsquos argumentHowever they are not structural markers In the clausal layout you will nd gen-itive chains and prepositional phrases on the same line as the structural marker that it modies e examples above show the complexity and exegetical options that these phrases present More discussion is given to these and other phrases in the syntactical explanation

Another stylistic feature that lends itself to Paulrsquos lengthy sentences in Ephesians is digression At times in the letter it appears that Paul moves away from his main point to either change his subject or add something beyond the topic of speech (Bullinger 906) Modern readers may conclude that Paul is absentminded but the letter would have been carefully craed Paul uses the digression for rhetori-cal egtect We nd digression in two texts e rst example is in Ephesians 21ndash7e subject of the sentence ὁ θεός (ldquoGodrdquo) appears in verse 4 e sentence is complex with three verbs συνεζωοποίησεν συνήγειρεν συνεκάθισεν God ldquomade us aliverdquo ldquoraisedrdquo and ldquoseated usrdquo with Christ e verbs appear toward the end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vvthe end of the sentence (vv 5bndash6) Paul begins the sentence by addressing the readers ldquoAnd even though you were dead in your trespasses and sinsrdquo But he goes into a long description of their former life as unbelievers and Godrsquos mercy

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 33: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

48 Introduction

(vv(vv(vv 1ndash4) He picks up his original thread in verse 5 by repeating the phrase but he changes the pronoun ldquoAnd even though we were dead in our trespassesrdquo e repetition suggests that verses 1ndash4 create a digression Another digression ap-pears in Ephesians 3 In verse 1 Paul begins his prayer that concludes the rst half of the book with the phrase ldquoFor this reason I Paul a prisoner of Christ Jesus on behalf of you the Gentilesrdquo However in verse 2 he begins a long discussion about the gospel ministry that God gave him Finally in verse 14 he returns to the benedictory prayer that ends the chapter (314ndash21)

Within the context of these lengthy sentences Paulrsquos short pithy sentences have a rhetorical egtect Both elliptical and asyndetic clauses have additional punchFor example aer one of his lengthy sentences (Eph 21ndash7) Paul gives four short sentences (Eph 28ndash9) e rst sentence is an independent conjunctive clause summarizing Godrsquos salvation described in verses 1ndash7 e next three sentences are elliptical emphasizing that this salvation is a gi from God e third and fourth sentences are asyndetons creating a contrast

28a τῇ γὰργὰρ χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοιἐστε σεσῳσmicroένοι διὰ πίστεως28a For you are savedyou are saved by grace through faith

|28b καὶ τοῦτο [ἐστίν] οὐκ ἐξ ὑmicroῶν28b and this [is] not from yourselves

|28c θεοῦ τὸ δῶρον [ἐστίν]28c it [is] a gi from God

|29a οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων [ἐστίν]29a it [is] not from works

|29b ἵνα microή τις καυχήσηταικαυχήσηται29b so that no one can boast

One more nal stylistic element to point out is the Hebraic inDuence on PaulTurner notes that perhaps ldquosome of the clearest Semitisms occur in this epis-tlerdquo (Turner2 84) is fact is hardly surprising since Paul himself was Jew-ish nonetheless it is worth highlighting some of these peculiar idioms within Ephesians e rst example is that Paul uses an attributive genitive with υἱόςor τέκνα to refer to a group of people associated with a specic quality (Moule 174) For example in Ephesians 22ndash3 Paul refers to unbelievers as ldquosons of disobediencerdquo (τοῖς υἱοῖς τῆς ἀπειθείας) and ldquochildren of wrath by naturerdquo (τέκνα φύσει ὀργῆς) e rst phrase insinuates that disobedience character-izes these people the second phrase suggests that they are destined for wrathIn Ephesians 56 he states that Godrsquos wrath will come upon these ldquosons of

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 34: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 49

disobediencerdquo and contrasts them with believers whom he calls ldquochildren of lightrdquo (Eph 58) Other attributive genitives such as ldquothe promised Holy Spiritrdquo (τῷ πνεύmicroατι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῷ ἁγίῳ) indicate a Semitic inDuence as well (W 86ndash88)

Second Paul makes indirect or redundant statements On two occasions he uses circumlocution with mouth to refer to speech (Eph 429 619) (Turner2 84)ere is possibly a Semitic idiom behind his use of the redundant relative pro-noun In Ephesians 24 he refers to Godrsquos great love ldquowith which he loves usrdquo Again in Ephesians 41 he encourages believers to walk according to the call ldquoby which you were calledrdquo By using a cognate verb in a relative clause to modify a word Paul places emphasis on the element

Finally Paulrsquos use of πᾶς hellip microή to mean ldquono onerdquo instead of οὐδείς reDects a Hebrew idiom For example in Ephesians 429 he writes πᾶς λόγος σαπρὸς ἐκ τοῦ στόmicroατος ὑmicroῶν microὴ ἐκπορευέσθω Instead of ldquoall wordsrdquo we might translate the phrase ldquodo not let any unwholesome words come out of your mouthrdquo We nd a similar construction in Ephesians 55 Instead of inserting the negative rst we have πᾶς πᾶς πόρνος ἢ ἀκάθαρτος ἢ πλεονέκτης hellip οὐκ ἔχει κληρονοmicroίανLiterally the phrase means that ldquoall immoral unclean or greedy person has no allinheritancerdquo but it might be best rendered ldquono immoral unclean or greedy per-son has an inheritancerdquo e construction emphasizes each member of a particu -lar class (Hoehner 660)

The Vocabulary of Ephesians

ere are some words in the letter of Ephesians that are unique ey do not ap-pear elsewhere in the New Testament e following chart identies forty hapax legomena in the book of Ephesians e following list was composed with the help of Burer and Millerrsquos A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament (2008 A New Readerrsquos Lexicon of the Greek New Testament362ndash71) and Sakae Kuborsquos A Readerrsquos Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament(1975 181ndash87)

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

111 ἐκληρώθηmicroεν ldquowe have obtained an inheritancerdquo (esv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv cfcfcf csb hcsb nlt)

ldquowe were chosenrdquo (niv cf cf cf rsv)

κληρόω ldquoobtain by lotrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 549

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 35: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

50 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

112 προηλπικότας ldquothe rst to hoperdquo (esv gnb nasb)

ldquothe rst to set our hoperdquo (nrsv net)

ldquothe rst to put our hoperdquo (niv)

ldquorst trustedrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquorst hopedrdquo (rsv)

ldquoalready put our hoperdquo (hcsb)

προελπίζω ldquoto hope beforerdquo or ldquobe the rst to hoperdquo BDAG svvv p 868

119 microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo (esv csb hscb nkjv kjv net nasb nrsv rsv nlt)

ldquogreatrdquo (niv)

microέγεθος ldquogreatnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 624

212 ἄθεοι ldquowithout Godrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv cjb)

ἄθεος ldquowithout Godrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 24

214 microεσότοιχον ldquomiddle wallrdquo (net kjv nkjv)

ldquodividing wallrdquo (esv leb nrsv rsv csb hcsb)

ldquobarrierrdquo (niv nasb)

ldquowallrdquo (nlt)

microεσότοιχον ldquodividing wallrdquo BDAG svvv p 635

219 συmicroπολῖται ldquofellow citizensrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquocitizensrdquo (nrsv)

ldquocitizens along withrdquo (nlt)

συmicroπολίτης ldquofellow-citizenrdquo or ldquocompatriotrdquo BDAG svvv p 959

221

416

συναρmicroολογουmicroένη συναρmicroολογούmicroενον

ldquojoined togetherrdquo (esvrsv nrsv niv net nlt)

ldquotted togetherrdquo (nasb nkjv)

ldquoput togetherrdquo (csb hcsb)

συναρmicroολογέω ldquotrdquo or ldquojoin to-getherrdquo BDAG svvv p 966

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 36: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 51

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

222 συνοικοδοmicroεῖσθε ldquobuilt togetherrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomade part of rdquo (nlt)

συνοικοδοmicroέω ldquoto build uprdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 974

36 σύσσωmicroα ldquomembers of the same bodyrdquo (esv rsv nrsv csb hcsb)

ldquoof the same bodyrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquofellow members of the bodyrdquo (net nasb)

σύσσωmicroος ldquobelonging to the same bodyrdquo BDAG svvv p 978

36

57

συmicromicroέτοχα συmicromicroέτοχοι

ldquopartakersrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

ldquopartnersrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquosharers togetherrdquo (niv)

ldquofellow partakersrdquo (net nasb)

συmicromicroέτοχος ldquosharing withrdquo BDAG svvv p 958

310 πολυποίκιλος ldquomanifoldrdquo (esv rsv niv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquomultifacetedrdquo (net csb hcsb)

ldquoin its rich varietyrdquo (nrsv nlt)

πολυποίκιλος ldquo(very) many-sidedrdquo BDAG svvv p 847

318 ἐξισχύσητε ldquohave the powerrdquo (niv rsv nrsv nlt)

ldquohave the strengthrdquo (esv)

ldquobe ablerdquo (csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv net)

ἐξισχύω ldquoto be ablerdquo ldquoto be strong enoughrdquo or ldquobe in a positionrdquo BDAG svvv p 350

43

413

ἑνότητα ldquounityrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquounited inrdquo (nlt)

ἑνότης ldquounityrdquo BDAG svvv p 338

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 37: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

52 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

48 ᾐχmicroαλώτευσεν ldquohe led a host of cap-tivesrdquo (esv rsv nlt cfcfcf nasb)

ldquohe took many cap-tivesrdquo (niv)

ldquohe captured captivesrdquo (net)

ldquohe made captivity itself a captiverdquo (nrsv cfcfcf nkjv kjv)

ldquohe took the captives captiverdquo (csb hcsb)

αἰχmicroαλωτεύω ldquoto capturerdquo or ldquotake captiverdquo BDAG svvv p 31

49 κατώτερα ldquolowerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolowlyrdquo (nlt)

κατώτερος ldquolowerrdquo BDAG svvv p 535

412 καταρτισmicroόν ldquoequiprdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net)

ldquoequippingrdquo (csb nasb nkjv)

ldquotrainingrdquo (hcsb)

ldquoperfectingrdquo (kjv)

καταρτισmicroός ldquoequipmentrdquo or ldquoequippingrdquo BDAG svvv p 526

414 κλυδωνιζόmicroενοι ldquotossed to and frordquo (rsv nrsv nkjv kjv)

ldquotossed to and fro by wavesrdquo (esv)

ldquotossed back and forth by the wavesrdquo (niv net)

ldquotossed by the wavesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquotossed here and there by wavesrdquo (nasb)

ldquotossedrdquo (nlt)

κλυδωνίζοmicroαι ldquoto be tossed here and there by wavesrdquo BDAG svvv p 550

414 κυβείᾳ ldquosleightrdquo (kjv)

ldquocunningrdquo (esv csb hcsb niv rsv)

ldquotrickeryrdquo (net nasb nrsv nkjv)

κυβεία ldquocrainessrdquo or ldquotrickeryrdquo BDAG svvv p 573

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 38: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 53

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

414

611

microεθοδείαν microεθοδείας

ldquoschemesrdquo (esv net)

ldquoschemingrdquo (nasb niv nrsv)

ldquotechniquesrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowilesrdquo (rsv)

ldquoplottingrdquo (nkjv)

microεθοδεία ldquoschemingrdquo or ldquocrainessrdquo BDAG svvv p 625

419 ἀπηλγηκότες ldquocallousrdquo (esv rsv net csb hcsb)

ldquolost all sensitivityrdquo (niv nrsv)

ldquopast feelingrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquohave no sense of shamerdquo (nlt)

ἀπαλγέω ldquoto become callousrdquo ldquodead to feelingrdquo or ldquobe despondentrdquo BDAG svvv p 96

423 ἀνανεοῦσθαι ldquorenewedrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb kjv nkjv nlt)

ldquomade newrdquo (niv)

ἀνανεόω ldquoto renewrdquo BDAG svvv 1 p 68

426 ἐπιδυέτω ldquogo downrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιδύω ldquoto sink downrdquo or ldquoto set (upon)rdquo BDAG svvv p 371

426 παροργισmicroῷ ldquoangerrdquo (esv rsv nrsv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowrathrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ldquoangryrdquo (niv nlt)

παροργισmicroός ldquoangry moodrdquo or ldquoangerrdquo BDAG svvv p 780

54 αἰσχρότης ldquolthinessrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoobscenerdquo (nrsv csb nlt)

ldquoobscenityrdquo (niv)

ldquovulgar speechrdquo (net)

αἰσχρότης ldquoshamefulnessrdquo or ldquoobscenityrdquo BDAG svvv p 29

54 microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo (esv niv net nlt cf cf cf csb hcsb nkjv kjv)

ldquosilly talkrdquo (rsv nrsv nasb)

microωρολογία ldquofoolish talkrdquo or ldquosilly talkrdquo BDAG svvv p 663

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 39: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

54 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

54 εὐτραπελία ldquocrude jokingrdquo (esv csb hcsb)

ldquocoarse jokingrdquo (niv cfcfcf nlt)

ldquocoarse jestingrdquo (net nasb nkjv cf cf cf kjv)

ldquolevityrdquo (rsv)

εὐτραπελία ldquocourse jestingrdquo or ldquorisqueacute witrdquo BDAG svvv xx p 414

512 κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo (esv rsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquosecretlyrdquo (nrsv)

κρυφῇ ldquoin secretrdquo BDAG svvv p 572

514 ἐπιφαύσει ldquowill shinerdquo (esv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb)

ldquowill give lightrdquo (rsv nkjv kjv nlt)

ἐπιφαύσκω ldquoto ariserdquo ldquoappearrdquo or ldquoshinerdquo BDAG svvv p 386

515 ἄσοφοι ldquofoolsrdquo (nkjv kjv nlt)

ldquounwiserdquo (esv niv net)

ldquounwise peoplerdquo (nrsv hcsb csb)

ldquounwise menrdquo (rsv nasb)

ἄσοφος ldquounwiserdquo or ldquofool-ishrdquo BDAG svvv p144

527 ῥυτίδα ldquowrinklerdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt)

ῥυτίς ldquoa wrinklerdquo BDAG svvv p 908

529

64

ἐκτρέφει ἐκτρέφετε ldquonourishesrdquo (529 esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquofeedsrdquo (529 net nlt cfcfcf niv)

ldquoprovidesrdquo (529 csb hcsb)

ldquobring uprdquo (64)

ἐκτρέφω ldquoto nourishrdquo ldquoto rearrdquo or ldquobring uprdquo BDAG svvv p 311

63 microακροχρόνιος ldquolive longrdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquolong liferdquo (niv csb hcsb nlt)

ldquoa long timerdquo (net)

microακροχρόνιος ldquolong-livedrdquo BDAG svvv p 613

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 40: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 55

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

67 εὐνοίας ldquoa good willrdquo (esv rsv nasb nkjv kjv)

ldquoenthusiasmrdquo (nrsv net nlt)

ldquogood attituderdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowholeheartedlyrdquo (niv)

εὔνοια ldquogood attituderdquo or ldquowillingnessrdquo BDAG svvv 2 p 409

612 πάλη ldquostrugglerdquo (nrsv niv net csb nasb)

ldquowrestlerdquo (esv nkjv kjv)

ldquobattlerdquo (hcsb)

ldquocontendingrdquo (rsv)

πάλη ldquostruggle againstrdquo BDAG svvv p 752

612 κοσmicroοκράτορας ldquoworld rulersrdquo (net rsv)

ldquoworld forcesrdquo (nasb)

ldquorulersrdquo (kjv nkjv)

ldquocosmic powersrdquo (esv nrsv csb)

ldquoworld powersrdquo (hcsb)

ldquopowers of this dark worldrdquo (niv)

κοσmicroοκράτωρ ldquoworld-rulerrdquo BDAG svvv p 561

615 ἑτοιmicroασίᾳ ldquopreparationrdquo (kjv nkjv net nasb)

ldquoreadinessrdquo (esv cjb gnt csb hcsb niv)

ldquowhatever will make you readyrdquo (nrsv)

ἑτοιmicroασία ldquoreadinessrdquo or ldquopreparationrdquo BDAG svvv p 401

616 θυρεόν ldquoshieldrdquo (esv rsv nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nkjv kjv nlt leb)

θυρεός ldquoshieldrdquo BDAG svvv p 462

616 βέλη ldquoarrowsrdquo (nrsv niv net csb hcsb nasb nlt)

ldquodartsrdquo (esv rsv nkjv kjv)

βέλος ldquoarrowrdquo BDAG svvv p 174

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 41: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

56 Introduction

Hapax Legomena in Ephesians

Verse Hapax Legomenon English Translations Lexical Form Lexical Meaning

618 προσκαρτερήσει ldquoperseverancerdquo (esv csb hcsb kjv nkjv leb net nasb rsv)

ldquoalways persevererdquo (nrsv)

ldquoalways keep onrdquo (niv)

προσκαρτέρησις ldquoperseverancerdquo or ldquopatiencerdquo BDAG svvv p 881

619 ἀνοίξει ldquoopeningrdquo (esv nasb rsv)

ldquowhen I openrdquo (csb hcsb)

ldquowhen I speakrdquo (nrsv cfcfcf net)

ldquowhenever I speakrdquo (niv)

ldquoI may openrdquo (nkjv kjv)

ἄνοιξις ldquoopeningrdquo BDAG svvv p 85

In summary there are a number of hapax legomena in Ephesians that add to the unique stylistic features of the letter e amount of variation in Paulrsquos word choice does not exceed the unique vocabulary we nd in his other letters e statistics alone do not seem to rule out Pauline authorship of the letter (Hagner 2012 591) Paul uses all three independent Greek clauses but he uses both the in-dependent Greek asyndeton and the independent Greek conjunctive clauses with regularityregularityregularity e independent Greek prepositional clause is more exceptional e frequency of these clauses highlight Paulrsquos style in Ephesians Less than 25 percent of the independent clauses occur in the rst half of the book (Eph 1ndash3) where we nd the lengthier sentences in the book

Paul uses a number of dependent clauses that make up these long sentencesdependent While Paul uses a variety of dependent clauses both the dependent Greek parti-ciple clauses and dependent conjunctive clauses appear with the most frequency throughout Ephesians Besides these dependent clauses Paul uses genitive chains and prepositional phrases to make longer sentences Finally he uses digression to both reinforce and reiterate points essential to the book ese lengthy sentences help to frame Paulrsquos shorter pithy statements While his long sentences may add rhetorical Dourish they make the simple sentences in the book stand out

All English translations reDect the interpretive decisions of the translator or com-mittee e same is true throughout this work Keep this in mind as you use this tool to study the text of Ephesians and compare it with other translations and

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 42: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Paulrsquos Style and Vocabulary in Ephesians 57

commentaries Remember to think critically as you si through the issues Al-though we are condent in our conclusions we take no ogtence if you digter from them We do however take ogtence if you just accept our conclusions at face value Our goal is for you to delve into the Greek text of Ephesians Engage the Scripture As a Bible student you will get no bigger payogt than when you actively wrestle with the Greek and Hebrew text of the Bible And remember to have fun as you pursue the language

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 43: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

58

Ephesians

Paul wrote the letter to the Ephesians to give them an update on his situation in prison At the end of the letter he says that he sent Tychicus to provide an update about his current situation (Eph 621ndash22) and yet he does not want them to lose heart concerning his present situation Paul most likely intended the letter to be read in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valleyread in several churches throughout the Lycos Valley e broad themes and omis-sion of specic greetings suggest that he has a wider audience in mind Regardless the letter has a coherent message for his readers (or more likely ldquohearersrdquo)

It is popular to divide Ephesians into two parts the rst half (Eph 1ndash3) addresses doctrinal issues and the second half (Eph 4ndash6) addresses ethical implicationsIt is true that Paul denes the relationship between the believers and God in the rst half the second half rests on this theological foundation However it might put too much weight on a dichotomy between theology and ethics Paul looks forward to the second half of the letter and he certainly continues to develop theological themes throughout the second part

Perhaps the most dominant theme in the book is that God saves the believer as an act of grace as a gi apart from works (Eph 28ndash9) rough this act of salvation God shows his power to the worldmdashthe same power at work in Christ when he raised him from the dead and enthroned him in heaven is resurrection pow-er is available to believers through their relationship with Christ (Eph 119ndash23 320ndash21 610ndash20)

From this main theme Paul develops two more additional and integrally related themes that are essential to his argument e rst is that God created a new hu-manity out of two distinct and antagonistic groups of people (Eph 214ndash16) e believers are able to partake in the promises of God due to their relationship with Christ regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicityChrist regardless of their ethnicity is new humanity makes up the churchPaul uses two key metaphors to describe the church In Ephesians 220ndash22 he de-scribes a building or a temple in which the Spirit dwells A more dominant met-aphor is the church as a body of which Christ is the head (Eph 122ndash23 415ndash16 529ndash32) e metaphors imply that unity is vital to the health of the church (Eph41ndash6) ese metaphors make two implications the church as an organism will mature and we are interconnected According to Paul we will become more like Christ and our choices and behavior agtect one another

e church plays a signicant role in Godrsquos plan In Ephesians 310 Paul indicates that God reveals his ldquomultifaceted wisdomrdquo to the rulers and authorities through the church is complex piece of wisdom is the unication of Gentiles with Jews

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 44: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Ephesians 59

a reference itself to the church is looks forward to the second half of the book where Paul describes how believers should conduct their lives in this world

e second related theme is that God has secured victory through Christ Iron-ically Paul who characterizes himself as an ambassador for God preaches this message of victory from prison is apparent defeat is not surprising Despite this triumph the church resides in a space dominated by those who have rebelled against God (Eph 22) roughout the letter Paul refers to a number of rulers authorities and powers (Eph 121 310) In Ephesians 612 he describes them as openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cfas openly hostile to believers (cf Eph 415) As we read the letter it becomes clear that these powers are angelic or spiritual cosmic forces that reside in the ldquoheavenly placesrdquo e chief of these hostile gures is the devil (Eph 427 622)e implication is clear even though God has achieved victory for the believer through Christ we must watch how we live in this foreign world lled with ene-my forces (Eph 515ndash16)

In the second half of the letter Paul shows how this theological reality impacts the believer As members of a new humanity believers have a new ethic As a result of their new relationship with God they should become holy set apart from the world in which they live Paul organizes the second half of the book around the Greek word περιπατέω (ldquowalkrdquo) a metaphor for how one behaves He uses the verb six times in the second part of the letter to describe how the believer should ldquowalkrdquo (Eph 41 17 [2x] 52 8 15) Believers should abstain from behavior that tears down the community lying stealing slander obscene joking unbridled anger sexual immorality greed Rather believers should characterize themselves with kindness generosity love and thanksgiving which reDect how God treated them (Eph 51) is does not mean that Paul calls the church out of the world but to live in a way that exposes the evil in the world (Eph 512)

Finally Paul ends the letter with an extensive description of the ldquofull armor of Godrdquo (Eph 610ndash20) which ties these themes together He tells believers ldquoto put onrdquo the armor to withstand the attacks of the devil (Eph 611ndash12 16) e imper-ative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfative ldquoput onrdquo alludes to the believerrsquos initiation into the Christian community (cfEph 424) Each piece of armor draws the reader back to the Christian faith the belt of truth the breastplate of righteousness shodding their feet with the gospel of peace the shield of faith the helmet of salvation and the sword of the SpiritGod has given believers the provision that they need for victory against Satan they nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian communitythey nd it in the Christian community

In short the letter of Ephesians is Paulrsquos call for this new community without ethnic distinction to live digterently in a hostile world in light of the radical change that God accomplished in their lives God himself provides the power for this new life a power that he demonstrated through the resurrection and ascension of Christ

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 45: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

60 Ephesians 11ndash2

Ephesians 11ndash2

Big Greek Idea Paul identies his credentials as an apostle through the will of God and greets the church in Ephesus by wishing them grace and peace from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Structural Overview Paul begins his letter with a normal three-part greeting that we nd in other rst-century letters (for more information on ancient letters see OrsquoBrien 1993b 550ndash53) First Paul identies himself as the author and describes his apostolic oce He states that the authority of his position comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (Eph 11) Second he identies his audience the community of believers in Ephesus He calls them both ldquosaintsrdquo (ἁγίοις) and ldquothe faithfulrdquo (πιστοῖς) in Christ Jesus (Eph 11) ird he concludes the greeting with a wish for their health Paul replaces the conventional health wish ldquoRejoicerdquo (χαίρειν) (cf(cf(cf Acts 1523 2326) with two nouns grace (χάρις) and peace (εἰρήνη) He prays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (vprays that these come from both the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (v 2)

OutlinePaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (vPaul greets the believers in Ephesus (v 1)Paul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (vPaul wishes the believers a blessing (v 2)

Clausal Outline for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ11a Paul an apostle of Christ Jesus by the will of God

11b (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ11b (to the saints who are in Ephesus) and the faithful in Christ Jesus

12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ12 grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ

Syntax Explained for Ephesians 11ndash2

11a Παῦλος e proper noun ldquoPaulrdquo is in the singular nominative form is is a normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himselfa normal way for a letter writer to identify himself Syntactically Παῦλος is the subject of the sentence (ldquoI Paul send greeting to the Ephesiansrdquo) Con-ventional letters do not include a verb ey follow a three-part structure (A to B Greetings See above Structural Overview) Semantically Παῦλος is a nominative absolute and does not require a verb (W 49ndash51) e nominative absolute regularly appears in phrases not normally construed as a sentence such as titles headings or salutations

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 46: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Ephesians 11ndash2 61

ἀπόστολος ἀπόστολος is a singular nominative masculine from the noun ἀπόστολος that means ldquoapostlerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 2c p 122) Se-mantically ἀπόστολος is in apposition to Παῦλος and retains the same syntactical relationship to the rest of the clause ldquoPaul an apostle of Christ Jesusrdquo (W 48ndash49) e title adds formality to his letter e following genitive (Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ) could either be a genitive of possession (ldquoan apostle belong-ing to Christ Jesusrdquo) or subjective genitive (ldquoan apostle sent by Christ Jesusrdquo) (W 82 n 30)

Lexical Nugget What does Paul mean when he calls himself an ldquoapos-tlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) e term ldquoapostlerdquo (ἀπόστολος) occurs eighty times in the New Testament thirty-four times in Paulrsquos writings and four times in Ephesians e term literally means an ldquoenvoyrdquo ldquodelegaterdquo or ldquomessengerrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόστολοςrdquo 1 p 122) however New Testament writers use the term to describe a specic group who functioned as Godrsquos messengerse basic characteristic of an apostle is having seen the risen Lord (1 Cor91) is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf is group surely included the Twelve but was most likely larger (cf 1 Cor 155ndash9) Paul himself describes his own apostleship as one ldquountimely bornrdquo (1 Cor 158) most likely referring to his Damascus road experience (cf(cf(cf Gal 113ndash17 Acts 91ndash19 221ndash21 269ndash18) (Barnett 1993 45ndash51) In Galatians 1ndash2 Paul defends his apostolic authority with the authenticity of the gospel message that he preached creating a link between the oce of an apostle and the content of the gospel message (Dunn 1998 572ndash73) Paul normally begins his letters by pointing to his apostolic authority (1 Cor11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Rom 11 Gal 11) e reference serves a specic purpose in each book In Ephesians Paul describes the apostles as the foundation of the church of which Jesus Christ is the cor-nerstone (Eph 220 cf 220 cf 220 cf Heb 31) God reveals his good news to the world through the apostolic proclamation (Eph 35) is proclamation of the gospel lies at the core of Paulrsquos apostolic ministry (Eph 38ndash13) Finally it is through his apostolic ministry that the believers are equipped for the work of service (Eph 411ndash12)

Paul states that this apostleship comes ldquothrough the will of Godrdquo (διὰ θελήmicroατος θεοῦ) e preposition διά marks the intermediate agent (W 433ndash35 specically 434 n 79 BDAG svvv ldquoδιάrdquo 3d pp 224ndash25) He regu-larly uses the phrase to describe the source of his apostlicity (1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 2 Tim 11 cf 11 cf 11 cf Gal 11) Most English versions translate the preposition as ldquoby the will of Godrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv kjv) e genitive θεοῦ can express possession ldquoGodrsquos willrdquo (csb hcsb) or as a subjective genitive an apostleship that ldquoGod willsrdquo e following section argues that all that God has done for the believer through Christ is a part of his plan (Eph 15) is includes Paulrsquos role as an apostle

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 47: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

62 Ephesians 11ndash2

Text-Critical Nugget Is Paul an ldquoapostle of Christ Jesusrdquo or ldquoof Jesus Christrdquo A number of Alexandrian ( A 1175 1739 1881) Western (F G) and Byzantine ( K L) manuscripts invert Jesusrsquos name and title Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ (cf (cf (cf MT RP2005 THGNT) On the other hand the earliest Alex-andrian manuscripts (46 B) and a key Western manuscript (D) follow the NA28 reading Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ In his salutations Paul normally refers to Jesus as Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ (Rom 11 1 Cor 11 2 Cor 11 Col 11 Phil 11 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 11 Titus 11 Philem 1) is suggests that the reading ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) is harder (Hoehner 133 n 2) is fact along with the superior external support suggests that the original read-ing is ldquoJesus Christrdquo (Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) though there is little digterence in meaning e structural layout follows the NA28

11b ἁγίοις e Greek word ἁγίοις is a masculine dative plural adjective from the noun ἅγιος e substantival form of the adjective means ldquoholy onesrdquo or ldquosaintsrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoἅγιοςrdquo 2dβ p 11) Paul regularly refers to believers this way (Eph 115 18 38 18 412 53 618) Syntactically ἁγίοις functions as a substantival adjective e Old Testament regularly uses the term in refer-ence to the nation of Israel (LXX Exod 2231 Pss 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf 153 3410 cf Lev Lev Lev 1145 192) By referring to believers as saints Paul identies Gentiles as the people of God (Arnold 69) e niv renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cf renders the adjective as ldquoGodrsquos holy peoplerdquo (cfnlt) Semantically ἁγίοις is a dative of recipient which appears in verbless constructions In this case the dative identies the saints in Ephesus as the recipients of the letter is type of dative regularly occurs in salutations (W 148ndash49) Holiness is an important theme for Paul in the letter e believers are called to holiness (Eph 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 14 527 cf 220) Holiness is not just a descrip-tion of the state of the believer but a process Later in the letter Paul describes Christ sanctifying the church by cleansing her (Eph 526) Paul imagines that the believer will grow into the full stature of Christ (Eph 413) On the one hand Paul describes the believers as holy but on the other he directs them to live in a manner worthy of that status (see Porter 1993 401)

οὖσιν e Greek word οὖσιν is a masculine plural dative present active parti-ciple from the verb εἰmicroί that means ldquoto berdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Most English translations render the participle as ldquowho arerdquo (esv rsv nrsv nasb BDAG svvv ldquoεἰmicroίrdquo 3a p 284) Syntactically οὖσιν is an attributive participle modifying ldquothe saintsrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις) Semantically οὖσιν is an equative pres-ent tense describing the believers as those who reside in Ephesus (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ)

Text-Critical Nugget Should the prepositional phrase ldquoin Ephesusrdquo (ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) be included in the text Several signicant Alexandrian manu-scripts have omitted the prepositional phrase ἐν Ἐφέσῳ (46 B 1739)e prepositional phrase occurs in most Western (D F G latt) and Byzantine

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 48: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Ephesians 11ndash2 63

manuscripts (K L w) Even though the omission of the phrase is support-ed by the most signicant manuscripts the participle phrase (τοῖς οὖσιν) and conjunction (καὶ) do not make sense without the prepositional phraseWithout the prepositional phrase we might translate the phrase as ldquoto the saints who are also faithfulrdquo Many commentators suggest that Ephesians was an encyclical letter a letter sent to several communities As the letter came to digterent communities in Asia Minor around Ephesus the reader could add the name of the communityadd the name of the communityadd the name of the community is would account for the omission of the phrase in the earliest manuscripts and the addition of the phrase in later manuscripts e more general message of Ephesians accounts for a broader audience than a single town However while the insertion may not be orig-inal Paul most likely intended that Ephesus be a part of the larger audiencee grammar requires a place name to be inserted so we have included itroughout the book we will refer to the recipients as the ldquoEphesiansrdquo (For more information see Metzger 532 net note for Eph 11)

καί e Greek word καί is a conjunction that means ldquoandrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoκαίrdquo 1bα p 494) Syntactically καί introduces a dependent coordinating clause ldquoand the faithful in Christ Jesusrdquo (καὶ πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) e conjunction joins this clause to the previous clause ldquothe saints who are in Ephesusrdquo (τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ἐφέσῳ) referring to the same group (W 270ndash86 spe-cically 282) Because of this many translations omit the conjunction (ldquoto the saints in Ephesus the faithfulrdquo net niv) or treat the adjective attributively (ldquoto the faithful saintsrdquo csb) (Barth 67ndash69) Semantically since Paul is referring to the same group of people καί is best understood as epexegetical (Merkle 13)

πιστοῖς e Greek word πιστοῖς is a dative plural masculine from the ad-jective πιστός that means ldquofaithfulrdquo or ldquotrustingrdquo In this context the adjective is used substantivally to refer to believers (BDAG svvv ldquoπιστόςrdquo 2 p 821)Syntactically πιστοῖς is parallel with ἁγίοις giving a further description of the believers ldquothe saints hellip and faithfulrdquo Semantically like ἁγίοις πιστοῖς is a dative of recipient e prepositional phrase ldquoin Christ Jesusrdquo (ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ) expresses sphere e Ephesian believersrsquo faith is in Christ Jesus (Hoeh-ner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cfner 143 ielman 34 Arnold 69 cf Col 12)

Syntactical Nugget How does the repeated preposition ldquoinrdquo (ἐν) relate to the context Paul addresses his letter to the saints in Ephesus the faithful in Christ Jesusin Christ Jesus

τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιντοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσινἐνἐν Ἐφέσῳ Ἐφέσῳ

καὶ πιστοῖςἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 49: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

64 Ephesians 11ndash2

e saints who arein Ephesus

and the faithfulin Christ Jesus

e repetition of the prepositional phrase gives balance to the recipientsBoth prepositions convey the idea of sphere e rst preposition provides the literal location of the believers whereas the second preposition pro-vides the location of their faith which will dominate Paulrsquos blessing in the next major section (Eph 13ndash14) Godrsquos blessing comes to the believers because they are ldquoin Christrdquo (see eological Nugget at 14a)

12 χάρις hellip καὶ εἰρήνη e Greek word χάρις is a nominative singular fem-inine from the noun χάρις that means ldquogracerdquo or ldquofavorrdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoχάριςrdquo 2c p 1079) e Greek word εἰρήνη is a nominative singular feminine from the noun εἰρήνη that means ldquopeacerdquo (BDAG svvv ldquoεἰρήνηrdquo 2a pp 287ndash88)Syntactically the two nouns are nominative absolutes an independent use of the nominative in introductory material that is not a sentence (W 49ndash51)It is possible that we assume the presence of the optative form of εἰmicroί (εἴη) (Arnold 69) Most major translations translate the phrase without the verb ldquoGrace to you and peacerdquo (esv rsv nrsv hcsb nasb nkjv) e kjv includes it ldquoGrace be to you and peacerdquo

Paul states that this grace and peace come ldquofrom God our Father and the Lord Je-sus Christrdquo (ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ) e preposi-tion ἀπό conveys the idea of source ldquofromrdquo (esv niv rsv nrsv csb nasb nkjv BDAG svvv ldquoἀπόrdquo 5d pp 106ndash7) Paul concludes the letter with a similar wish for peace love and faith from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ (Eph 623ndash24) (Lincoln 6 Arnold 69ndash71) By stating that this blessing comes from both God the Father and Jesus Christ Paul implicitly places Jesus and God on equal footing and reDects the early Christian devotion of Jesus (Hurtado 2018 54ndash55)

+eological Nugget Why does Paul greet his readers with ldquograce and peacerdquo is is a standard greeting in Paulrsquos letters (Rom 17 1 Cor 13 2 Cor 12 Gal 13 Phil 12 Col 12 1 ess 11 2 ess 12 Philem 3 cfcfcf 1 Tim 11 2 Tim 12 Titus 14) e greeting is identical in Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Galatians Ephesians Philippians 2 essalo-nians and Philemonnians and Philemon

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

In Colossians he omits the reference to Christ χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν but in 1 essalonians he omits the entire

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν

Page 50: Nestle-Aland, No!um Testamentum Graece › books › pdfs › excerpts › 9780825445439.pdf · 2020-03-03 · during their initial study of New Testament Greek in their college or

Ephesians 11ndash2 65

prepositional phrase χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη Titus gives a similar greet-ing but he refers to Jesus as ldquoChrist Jesus our saviorrdquo (χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν) Finally both 1 and 2 Timothy ogter a unique greeting but add ldquomercyrdquo (ἔλεος) χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡmicroῶν(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)(ldquograce mercy and peace from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lordrdquo)

Conventional letters in antiquity use the innitive χαίρειν (cf (cf (cf Acts 1523 2326) (Klauck 2006 18ndash19) but Paul uses the nominal form (χάρις) and adds εἰρήνη a Greek translation of the standard Jewish greeting ldquopeacerdquo (ldquoshalomrdquo ) Paul may alter the standard greeting to allude to larger themes that appear throughout the letter Grace is the basis of our salvation (Eph 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf 25 8ndash9 cf Rom 324) rough this salvation believers have peace with one another and with God (Eph 214ndash15 17 43 cf43 cf43 cf Rom 51)

Romans 17Romans 171 Corinthians 131 Corinthians 132 Corinthians 122 Corinthians 12Galatians 13Galatians 13Ephesians 12Ephesians 12Philippians 12Philippians 12Philemon 3Philemon 32 essalonians 122 essalonians 12

χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν καὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦκαὶ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ

Colossians 12Colossians 12 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶνχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡmicroῶν

1 essalonians 111 essalonians 11 χάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνηχάρις ὑmicroῖν καὶ εἰρήνη

1 Timothy 111 Timothy 112 Timothy 122 Timothy 12Titus 14

χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶνἸησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡmicroῶν